Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 177

CENTAC CMC Technical Reference Manual

INGERSOLL-RAND
AIR COMPRESSORS

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Copyright Notice
Copyright 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company THIS MANUAL IS SOLD "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. Printing Date: 18 October, 1999 Ingersoll-Rand air compressors are not designed, intended, or approved for breathing air applications. Ingersoll-Rand does not approve specialized equipment for breathing air applications and assumes no responsibility or liability for compressors used for breathing air service.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Table of Contents
Whats New In This Manual_____________________________________________ 1 References __________________________________________________________ 2 General - CMC Panel __________________________________________________ 3 Control Methodology __________________________________________________ 4
Performance Control ________________________________________________________4
Unload _____________________________________________________________________________ 4 Constant Pressure Control - Modulate ____________________________________________________ 4 Energy Saving Control - Autodual ________________________________________________________ 5 How does Constant Pressure Modulation Work? _________________________________________ 6 Measuring the Discharge Pressure __________________________________________________ 6 Proportional Band ________________________________________________________________ 7 Integral Time ____________________________________________________________________ 7 Motor Current, MinLoad and MaxLoad________________________________________________ 8

Surge Control _____________________________________________________________10


Control Methodology _________________________________________________________________ 10 Surge Detection _____________________________________________________________________ 10 Insufficient Rise To Surge ___________________________________________________________ 10 Changes in System Discharge Pressure _______________________________________________ 11 Rapid System Demand Changes _____________________________________________________ 11 Incorrect Instrumentation Output _____________________________________________________ 12 How is Surge Detected? ____________________________________________________________ 12 Surge AbsorberTM ___________________________________________________________________ 12 Surge Indexing ______________________________________________________________________ 13

Oil System Control___________________________________________________ 14


Prelube Pump _____________________________________________________________14 Oil Heater_________________________________________________________________14

Protection and Monitoring_____________________________________________ 15


Analog Functions __________________________________________________________15
Analog Inputs _______________________________________________________________________ 15 Analog Outputs _____________________________________________________________________ 15

Digital Functions ___________________________________________________________15


Digital Inputs _______________________________________________________________________ 16 Digital Outputs ______________________________________________________________________ 16

Compressor Operating Methodology ____________________________________ 17


Stopped __________________________________________________________________17
Waiting ____________________________________________________________________________ 17 Not Ready _________________________________________________________________________ 17 Ready _____________________________________________________________________________ 17

Rotating __________________________________________________________________17
Starting____________________________________________________________________________ 17 Unloaded __________________________________________________________________________ 18

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Loading____________________________________________________________________________ 18 MinLoad, Loaded, Full Load and MaxLoad________________________________________________ 18 Unloading __________________________________________________________________________ 18 Coasting ___________________________________________________________________________ 18

Compressor Operating States _______________________________________________19

User Interface _______________________________________________________ 20


OUI (Operator User Interface) _______________________________________________20
Command Keys _____________________________________________________________________ 21 Enter Key - Display Operating Mode ____________________________________________________ 21 Navigation Keys _____________________________________________________________________ 21 Contrast Key _______________________________________________________________________ 22 Graphic Display _____________________________________________________________________ 22 Folder and Page __________________________________________________________________ 22 Status Bar _______________________________________________________________________ 22 Edit (Setpoint Changes) Mode _________________________________________________________ 23 Navigation Mode_____________________________________________________________________ 23 SYSTEM Folder_____________________________________________________________________ 25 INFO Folder ________________________________________________________________________ 26 SETTINGS Folder ___________________________________________________________________ 29

General Sequence of Operation _____________________________________________34 Indicator, Switch and Light Layout ____________________________________________35
Lights _____________________________________________________________________________ 35 Push Buttons _______________________________________________________________________ 35 Switches___________________________________________________________________________ 35

CMC Tuning Procedures ______________________________________________ 35


Setting MaxLoad ___________________________________________________________36 Setting MinLoad ___________________________________________________________36 Setting MinLoad Surge Index Increment_______________________________________37 Setting Surge Sensitivity____________________________________________________37 Tuning Stability ____________________________________________________________38 Calibrating the Control Valves _______________________________________________39 Autodual Control Settings ___________________________________________________40
Unload Point (Bypass Valve % Open) ___________________________________________________ 40 Unload Delay Time (seconds)__________________________________________________________ 41 Reload Percent _____________________________________________________________________ 41

Setting the Start Time ______________________________________________________42 Setting the CT Ratio________________________________________________________42 Inlet Unload Position _______________________________________________________42 Setting Set Point Ramp Rate_________________________________________________43 Alarm and Trip Settings _____________________________________________________43

Troubleshooting_____________________________________________________ 44
1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Troubleshooting Example ___________________________________________________45 Input/Output (I/O) System ___________________________________________________46
Vibration Monitoring System (VMS)_____________________________________________________ 46 Checking Vibration Transmitter Power_______________________________________________ 47 Checking Vibration Circuit ________________________________________________________ 47 Check the Vibration Probe, and Cable_______________________________________________ 48 Checking the Vibration Probe______________________________________________________ 48 Check the BCM _________________________________________________________________ 49 Temperature Monitoring System (TMS) __________________________________________________ 50 Checking for Power to the Temperature Transmitter ____________________________________ 51 Checking for a Faulty RTD ________________________________________________________ 52 Degrees Fahrenheit versus Ohms value chart for 100 OHM Platinum RTD __________________ 53 Degrees Celsius versus Ohms value chart for 100 OHM Platinum RTD ____________________ 54 Checking the RTD Transmitter _____________________________________________________ 55 Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring______________________________________ 56 Valve Control System (VCS)___________________________________________________________ 57 Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring______________________________________ 58 Checking proper operation of the I/P and positioner ____________________________________ 59 Pressure Monitoring System (PMS)_____________________________________________________ 60 Checking for Power to the Pressure Transmitter_______________________________________ 61 Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring______________________________________ 62 Quick check of the PT ___________________________________________________________ 63 Functional PT test_______________________________________________________________ 63 Digital Input System (DIS)_____________________________________________________________ 64 Checking proper operation of the digital devices _______________________________________ 65

Control Power System (CPS) ________________________________________________66


No AC power ___________________________________________________________________ 67 No DC power ___________________________________________________________________ 68 No digital input power ____________________________________________________________ 68 No digital output power ___________________________________________________________ 68 No analog input power____________________________________________________________ 68 No analog output power __________________________________________________________ 68 No OUI power __________________________________________________________________ 68 No CPU power__________________________________________________________________ 69

Controller Problems ________________________________________________________70


BCM Problems______________________________________________________________________ 71 BCM is not controlling____________________________________________________________ 71 OUI Problems_______________________________________________________________________ 71 OUI is dim _____________________________________________________________________ 71 OUI is black____________________________________________________________________ 71 OUI displays INGERSOLL-RAND Centrifugal Compressor Division_______________________ 71 UCM Problems______________________________________________________________________ 71 All UCM LEDs are not lit _________________________________________________________ 71

Options ____________________________________________________________ 72
Enclosures________________________________________________________________72
NEMA 12 (IP 64) ____________________________________________________________________ 72 Cooling Fan ________________________________________________________________________ 72 NEMA 4 (IP 65) _____________________________________________________________________ 72 NEMA 4X (IP 65) ____________________________________________________________________ 72 Space Heater _______________________________________________________________________ 73

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Vortex Tube Cooler __________________________________________________________________ 73 Type Z Purge _______________________________________________________________________ 73 Fused Control Power Disconnect _______________________________________________________ 73

Control Electrical Package __________________________________________________74 Stage Data Package ________________________________________________________74 Alarm Horn ________________________________________________________________74 Running Unloaded Shutdown Timer __________________________________________74 Water Solenoid Post Run Timer ______________________________________________74 Panel Mounted Wye-Delta Starter ____________________________________________74 N.O. Contact for Remote Indication of Common Alarm and Trip ___________________74 Power Regulating Constant Voltage Transformer _______________________________75 Automatic Starting__________________________________________________________75
Remote Start and Remote Stop Hardwired ______________________________________________ 75 Remote Start Digital Input ___________________________________________________________ 75 Remote Stop Digital Input ___________________________________________________________ 75 Communications ____________________________________________________________________ 75 Auto-Hot Start ______________________________________________________________________ 76 Auto-Cold Start _____________________________________________________________________ 76

Remote 4-20 mA Pressure Setpoint ___________________________________________76 Steam and Gas Turbine Driven Compressors __________________________________76
Performance Control _________________________________________________________________ 76 Motor Current, MinLoad and MaxLoad _________________________________________________ 76 Surge Control _______________________________________________________________________ 77 How Surge is Detected _____________________________________________________________ 77 Compressor Operating Methodology ____________________________________________________ 77 Accelerate-1______________________________________________________________________ 77 Accelerate-2______________________________________________________________________ 78 Slow Rolling ______________________________________________________________________ 78 Quick Start Turbines _______________________________________________________________ 78 Operator User Interface (OUI) __________________________________________________________ 78 Status Bar _______________________________________________________________________ 78 System Folder ____________________________________________________________________ 78 Info Folder _______________________________________________________________________ 78 Settings Folder ___________________________________________________________________ 79 General Sequence of Operation ________________________________________________________ 80 Starting Methodology ______________________________________________________________ 80

Diesel Driven Compressors _________________________________________________83

Communication _____________________________________________________ 84
Centac Energy Master (CEM) ________________________________________________84 Direct CMC Communications with RS422/485___________________________________84 The CMC-MODBUS Interface ________________________________________________85
Introduction_________________________________________________________________________ 85 Serial Modes _______________________________________________________________________ 85

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


MODBUS Messages _________________________________________________________________ 86 Device Address ___________________________________________________________________ 86 Function Code ____________________________________________________________________ 86 Data Addresses ___________________________________________________________________ 86 Single Module Addresses _________________________________________________________ 87 Multiple Module Addresses _______________________________________________________ 87 Data ____________________________________________________________________________ 87 Byte Count _______________________________________________________________________ 87 Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) ___________________________________________________ 87 Function Details_____________________________________________________________________ 87 Function 01 - Read Coil Status_______________________________________________________ 87 Example: Reading a Single Coil ___________________________________________________ 88 Example: Reading Multiple Coils __________________________________________________ 89 Function 02 - Read Input Status ______________________________________________________ 89 Example: Read Single Discrete Input _______________________________________________ 90 Example: Read Multiple Discrete Inputs_____________________________________________ 90 Function 03 - Read Holding Registers _________________________________________________ 91 Example: See example for Function 04._____________________________________________ 94 Function 04 - Read Input Registers ___________________________________________________ 94 Example: Read Single Channel 16-Bit Integer and Fraction _____________________________ 95 Example: Read Single Channel IEEE 32-Bit Floating Point Number ______________________ 96 Example: Read Multiple Channels _________________________________________________ 97 Function 05 - Force Single Coil ______________________________________________________ 97 Example: Forcing a Coil _________________________________________________________ 98 Function 06 - Preset Single Register __________________________________________________ 98 Example: Presetting a Single Register (16-bit) Integer _________________________________ 99 Function 15 (0F Hex) - Force Multiple Coils ____________________________________________ 99 Example: Forcing Multiple Coils __________________________________________________ 100 Function 16 (10 Hex) - Preset Multiple Registers _______________________________________ 100 Example: Presetting Holding Registers for 32-bit Values ______________________________ 101 Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Holding Register ________________ 103 Exception Responses _______________________________________________________________ 103 Function Code Field ______________________________________________________________ 104 Data Field_______________________________________________________________________ 104 Exception Codes Supported by the CMC Microcontroller_________________________________ 104 Maximum Query / Response Parameters _______________________________________________ 105 CMC Data_________________________________________________________________________ 105 Scaling and Units of Measure _________________________________________________________ 105 Communication Parameters __________________________________________________________ 105

The CMC-DF1 Interface ____________________________________________________106


Introduction________________________________________________________________________ 106 Full-Duplex Protocol ________________________________________________________________ 107 DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol Message Frames ___________________________________________ 107 DF1 Device Address ______________________________________________________________ 107 Destination (DST) Byte ____________________________________________________________ 107 Source (SRC) Byte _______________________________________________________________ 108 Command (CMD) and Function (FNC) Bytes___________________________________________ 108 Status (STS) Byte - Status Error Code _______________________________________________ 108 Transaction (TNS) Bytes ___________________________________________________________ 108 BCC (Block Check Character) and CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)_______________________ 108 BCC (One Byte) _______________________________________________________________ 109 CRC (Two Bytes)_______________________________________________________________ 109 Data Addressing ___________________________________________________________________ 110

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


CMC as PLC5 ___________________________________________________________________ 110 CMC as SLC5/04_________________________________________________________________ 111 Data File Addressing for PLC5/SLC504 _______________________________________________ 111 CMC Data Addressing_____________________________________________________________ 112 Supported Functions ________________________________________________________________ 116 Command 0F/Function 68 - PLC5 Typed Read _________________________________________ 116 Example: Reading an Analog Input ________________________________________________ 116 As 16-Bit Integer and Fraction ____________________________________________________ 117 As IEEE 32-Bit Floating Point Number _____________________________________________ 118 Example: Read Multiple Analog Channels __________________________________________ 119 Example: Reading a Discrete Value _______________________________________________ 119 Example: Reading Multiple Discrete Values ________________________________________ 120 Example: Reading Bit-Packed Discrete Data________________________________________ 120 Command 0F/Function 67 - PLC5 Typed Write_________________________________________ 121 Example: Presetting Analog Setpoints for 32-bit Values _______________________________ 121 Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Analog Setpoint _________________ 123 Example: Forcing a Coil ________________________________________________________ 123 Example: Forcing Multiple Coils __________________________________________________ 124 Command 0F/Function A2 - SLC Typed Logical Read ___________________________________ 125 Example: Reading an Analog Value _______________________________________________ 125 Example: Reading Multiple Analog Values__________________________________________ 126 Example: Reading Single Discrete Data____________________________________________ 126 Example: Reading 16 Bit-Packed Discrete Data _____________________________________ 126 Command 0F/Function AA - SLC Typed Logical Write___________________________________ 127 Example: Presetting Analog Setpoint for 32-bit Value_________________________________ 127 Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Analog Setpoint _________________ 127 Example: Forcing a Coil ________________________________________________________ 127 Example: Forcing Multiple Coils __________________________________________________ 128 Allen-Bradley SLC 504 Example_______________________________________________________ 128 Data Files_______________________________________________________________________ 128 RSLogix 500 Ladder Diagram _______________________________________________________ 128 UCM STS Error Codes ______________________________________________________________ 129 Communication Parameters __________________________________________________________ 130 Network Setup _____________________________________________________________________ 130 1770-KF2 Setup____________________________________________________________________ 132 SW-1 (Asynchronous Link Features)_________________________________________________ 132 SW-2, SW-3, SW-4 (Node Address) _________________________________________________ 132 SW-5 (Network Link Communication Rate) ____________________________________________ 133 SW-6 (Asynchronous Link Communication Rate and Diagnostic Commands) ________________ 133 SW-7 (Network Link Selection)______________________________________________________ 134 SW-8 (RS-232C/RS-422A Selection) _________________________________________________ 134 Wiring Diagram for RS-422A ________________________________________________________ 134

Documentation_____________________________________________________ 135 System Information _________________________________________________ 135


Status Codes_____________________________________________________________135 Base Control Module (BCM)________________________________________________137
Module Layout _____________________________________________________________________ 137 Connector Description _______________________________________________________________ 138 Connector Input and Output (I/O) ______________________________________________________ 139

Operator User Interface Module (OUI) _______________________________________140 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Module Layout _____________________________________________________________________ 140 Connector Description _______________________________________________________________ 140 Connector Input and Output (I/O) ______________________________________________________ 140 CMC User Interface/Bezel Cleaning Instructions __________________________________________ 141 Backlight Replacement Procedure _____________________________________________________ 141

Universal Communication Module (UCM) Optional _____________________________144


Module Layout _____________________________________________________________________ 144 Connector Description _______________________________________________________________ 145 Connector Input and Output (I/O) ______________________________________________________ 145 Setting UCM Switches ______________________________________________________________ 145 UCM Port Activity LEDs _____________________________________________________________ 145 UCM Communications Parameters ____________________________________________________ 146 UCM Timeout ______________________________________________________________________ 146 RS422/485 Network Wiring Diagram - Full Duplex ________________________________________ 147 RS422 Network Wiring Diagram - Half Duplex ____________________________________________ 148 Terminating Resistor ________________________________________________________________ 149 Typical System Layout ______________________________________________________________ 149 Network Diagram ___________________________________________________________________ 150

Technical Specification ______________________________________________ 151 Glossary ____________________________________________________________ 1 Service Tool Variable Names ___________________________________________ 7

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Table of Figures
Figure 1: Compressed Air System ........................................................................................................ 4 Figure 2: Autodual Control.................................................................................................................... 5 Figure 3: Modulate Control ................................................................................................................... 5 Figure 4: Performance Control .............................................................................................................. 6 Figure 5: Proportional Band, Pb............................................................................................................ 7 Figure 6: Proportional Plus Integral Control ............................................................................................ 8 Figure 7: MinLoad and MaxLoad ........................................................................................................... 8 Figure 8: Rise To Surge ..................................................................................................................... 11 Figure 9: Changes in Discharge Pressure ............................................................................................ 11 Figure 10: Changes in Discharge Pressure .......................................................................................... 12 Figure 11: Plant Air System ............................................................................................................... 35 Figure 12: Troubleshooting Tree .......................................................................................................... 44 Figure 13: MODBUS Messages ......................................................................................................... 85

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Whats New In This Manual


This is the third version of the CMC Manual. This version was created to support new features incorporated into the CMC Product, and provide additional information in general compared with the first and second versions. Specifically, new features are as follows: 1. The basic compressor control logic has been refined to give even better pressure control than before. 2. Surge AbsorberTM . This feature replaces Surge Reload and reduces the magnitude and duration of pressure variations for a surge cycle. 3. Gas and steam turbine driven compressor control with Adaptive StartingTM now available as a standard option. 4. Diesel driven compressor control with Adaptive StartingTM now available as a standard option. 5. Event log has been expanded to 224 events all scrollable from the OUI. New events have been added for surge, turbine operation, multiple board failure and control parameter edits from both local or remote control locations. This added information is invaluable for troubleshooting. 6. Allen-Bradley DF1 communication protocol has been added for connection to Data Highway Plus (DH+) networks. 7. More data available is available at a faster rate from a single communication read. 8. Three module support. This allows systems to contain as many as 69 analog inputs, 3 CT inputs, 3 speed inputs, 12 analog outputs, 48 discrete inputs and 48 discrete outputs. 9. Added math capabilities allow for more options. 10. The OUI has been updated to enhance the overall look and feel and ease of use. The Coasting Timer and BCM Version have been added. 11. New fonts have been added for Russian, Arabic and Greek. 12. New diagnostic feature for Motor Failure Trip. This helps in troubleshooting compressor starting problems. 13. Derivative constants for the Inlet Valve Pressure, MinLoad and MaxLoad PID control loops along with the Bypass Valve Pressure PID control loops have been added to the OUI, this feature provides a higher level of tuning capabilities for the knowledgeable User.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

References
The following references were used in creating this document. All of this documentation is recommended for a more detailed understanding of specific control modes and control panel functions. NEMA STANDARDS PUBLICATION NO. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), Revision 2, May 1988 NFPA 496 Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, 1986 Edition Nisenfeld, A. Eli, Centrifugal Compressors: Principles of Operation and Control, Instrument Society of America, 1982 Moore, Ralph L., Control of Centrifugal Compressors, Instrument Society of America, 1989 Doebelin, Ernest O., Control System Principles and Design, John Wiley & Sons, 1985 Rowland, James R., Linear Control Systems Modeling, Analysis, and Design, John Wiley & Sons, 1986 Deshpande, Pradeep B. and Ash, Raymond H., Computer Process Control With Advanced Control Applications, 2nd Edition, Instrument Society of America, 1988 CENTAC ENERGY MASTER, Version CEM230, Ingersoll-Rand Company, March 1992 White, M.H., Surge Control for Centrifugal Compressors, Chemical Engineering, December 25, 1972 Hall, James W., THERMODYNAMICS OF COMPRESSION: A Review of Fundamentals, Instrument Society of America, 1976 Gaston, John R., Centrifugal Compressor Operation & Control: Part II "Compressor Operation", Instrument Society of America, 1976 Gaston, John R., Antisurge Control Schemes For Turbocompressors, Chemical Engineering, April 1982 Warnock, J. D., Methods for Control of Centrifugal and Reciprocating Compressors, Moore Products, 1984 Harrison, Howard L. and Bollinger, John G., Introduction to Automatic Controls, Second Edition, Harper & Row, 1969

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

General - CMC Panel


The CMC panel is the microprocessor-based control and monitoring system for Centac and X-FLO centrifugal compressors. The CMC handles all pressure control and monitoring functions; as well as, control auxiliary equipment such as the main motor starter, oil heater, and prelube pump. The CMC panel has a custom designed computer board called the Base Control Module (BCM). This board has a microcontroller and memory chips that tell the rest of the panel what to do for the various input pressures, temperatures and vibrations. All hardware for data analysis, number of input and output (I/O) points and system memory are optimally selected for accurately controlling and protecting Centac and X-FLO compressors. Features of the CMC system are:

Ease of use ... only twelve buttons to push on the operator OUI! Multiple function, 240 x 128 pixel graphic LCD display to display data and operating status Unload, Modulate and Auto-Dual operating modes. Advanced surge detection and control. High current limit for main drive electric motor protection. First-out indication and event log to help determine the root cause of a compressor trip. Pinion vibration alarm and trip for each compression stage. Optional port for communicating to the Centac Energy Master (CEM) or other Distributed Control Systems (DCS) via MODBUS protocol. Optional reduced voltage motor starter included in panel for some sizes.

NOTE For the purpose of consistency and clarity, all of the descriptions and examples that follow refer to "air" for the more generic "gas". Any gas compressed by a Centac or XFLO compressor would also apply.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Control Methodology
The CMC utilizes performance and surge control methodologies to meet varying compressed air system needs. The term "performance control" is used for grouping the control modes that affect compressor power consumption through movement of the intake and discharge valves.

Performance Control
The CMC has three standard performance control modes or methods of operation. These modes are Unload, Modulate and Autodual for typical plant air compressors operating in constant pressure applications. For the discussions that follow, Figure 1 depicts a compressed air system and the relationship between the compressor and the plant air system.

Atmosphere Silencer
Inlet Valve Bypass Valve

Check Valve

Plant Air System

Inlet Filter

Compressor

Figure 1: Compressed Air System

Unload
The compressor is unloaded, when no air is being supplied to the Plant Air System, and all of the air produced by the compressor is being vented to the atmosphere. In this mode, the inlet valve is slightly open to allow enough air to pass through the compressor for internal cooling, prevention of rotor instability and surge avoidance. This air is then discharged through the fully open bypass valve to the atmosphere. Typically, the compressor is set to make a positive pressure across the first compression stage, which produces a discharge pressure something greater than the atmospheric pressure. The inlet valve opening required to create this positive pressure is directly related to the horsepower consumed; therefore, careful consideration should be given to this inlet valve position for minimizing overall power consumption.

Constant Pressure Control - Modulate


Constant pressure control is a frequently required performance control method for Centac air compressors. If left uncontrolled, the compressor's discharge pressure would rise and fall along the natural performance curve as system demand changed. Modulate control satisfies the constant pressure requirement. The performance map in Figure 2 shows Modulate control. Modulate maintains the system discharge pressure at the system pressure set point as entered into the CMC by the user. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Once loaded, the compressor will operate along the constant pressure line until the user switches to Unload or presses the stop button. Control is accomplished by modulating the inlet valve within the compressor's throttle range. When system demand is less than the minimum throttled capacity, the discharge pressure is maintained by modulating the bypass valve and venting some or all of the air to atmosphere. This valve is opened just prior to reaching the surge line. Whenever the bypass valve is open, the inlet valve maintains its position at the minimum throttled capacity setting. Modulate provides a constant discharge pressure with variable capacity from design to zero. This control method is used when reliable control of the discharge pressure is required. Modulate is the most commonly used control method for Centac and X-FLO compressors.
Surge Line Unload Point Natural Curve Design Point Reload Point (Reload Percent)
Natural Pressure Curve Design Point

Constant Pressure Line Surge Line

Discharge Pressure

Maximum Throttle Point (MinLoad) Unloaded

Bypass Valve Throttle Range Surge Line Constant Power Line

Inlet Valve Throttle Range Natural Power Curve

Power at Coupling

Unloaded

Capacity

Figure 3: Modulate Control

Discharge Pressure

Energy Saving Control - Autodual


Autodual automatically loads the machine when demand is high and unloads the machine when demand is low. When the compressor is controlling to pressure setpoint and demand is within the inlet valve throttle range, constant pressure is maintained in the same manner as Modulate. When the machine is controlling to the pressure setpoint and system demand is low, the compressor is operated in the bypass valve throttle range. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999
Power at Coupling
Unloaded Bypass Valve Throttle Range Unload Point Inlet Valve Throttle Range

Natural Curve

Unloaded

Capacity

Figure 2: Autodual Control

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Autodual automatically unloads the machine when the bypass valve is opened beyond the Unload Point for a programmed time period called the Unload Delay Time. The Bypass Valve Unload Point is selected to correspond with the check valve closing since at this point the machine is not supplying the system (Figure 1). The Unload Delay Timer should be set to prevent unloading during short excursions through the Unload Point. The Reload Percent determines the System Pressure at which the machine will automatically load into the system.

How does Constant Pressure Modulation Work?


The goal of constant pressure modulation is to maintain a specified discharge pressure in the compressed air system while the capacity requirements change. Modulate control provides constant pressure from 100 percent of the compressor's capacity to zero capacity. Autodual control provides constant pressure from the 100 percent of the compressor's capacity to the Unload Point. If all plant air systems were identical in capacity usage requirements, the CMC could be preprogrammed to respond to those changes; however, all plant air systems are not alike. The frequency and variability of the capacity changes means that the control logic must be flexible, so the CMC utilizes proportional plus integral control algorithms to determine the magnitude of the signal that is sent to the inlet and bypass valves. These algorithms, or programming logic, allow the CMC control system to be "tuned" to a specific plant air system. Measuring the Discharge Pressure In order to maintain constant pressure, the system discharge air pressure must be measured. A pressure transducer is mounted in the control panel and tubed to the compressor discharge downstream of the check valve as shown in Figure 4.
CMC
PT Pneumatic Tubing Bypass Valve Base Control Module 4-20 mA CT Starter Check Valve

Motor

Compressor

4-20 mA

Inlet Valve

Figure 4: Performance Control

This transducer sends a 4-20 mA signal to the CMC board. The CMC compares the measured discharge pressure to the system pressure set point entered into the CMC by the user through the Operator User Interface (OUI). Depending upon the difference between these two values the CMC will send a 4-20 mA signal to "Modulate", open or close, the inlet and/or bypass valve to maintain the specified system pressure set point.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Proportional Band Proportional control varies the signal sent to the valves as a linear response to the difference between the actual system pressure and the system pressure set point. Valve responsiveness can be adjusted through the CMC with the proportional band, Pb, set point. This scaling factor, graphically depicted in Figure 5, is the amount of change in the input variable (actual minus set point pressures) to cause a full scale change in the output variable (valve position). In other words, if the pressure in the air system fluctuates frequently, it would be prudent to set Pb to a low value to keep up with those system changes. Otherwise, if the system is very stable, a larger value can be used. Pb is directly related to valve life and indirectly related to valve cycling; so, as Pb decreases, valve life decreases and cycling increases. As stated earlier, the CMC uses a proportional plus integral control algorithm. The result of proportional only control is offset from the controlled variable, discharge pressure. This means that if the set point pressure is 100, the actual pressure may only be 95. The value of this offset depends upon the proportional band value. What is the valve response when the difference between actual and set point pressures is zero? There is no response. Proportional control only functions when a difference or error exists. Design discharge pressure could not be attained in a proportional only control system. Therefore, an integral control algorithm is added to achieve the desired discharge pressure. Integral Time The offset produced by the proportional control algorithm could be eliminated by manually readjusting the system pressure set point. Using the example above, the set point could be reset to 105 to obtain the 100 desired. Manually resetting the set point would be required as the system demand fluctuated. Integral control, also known as reset control, automatically resets the desired system pressure set point. For the CMC, the rate at which the controller resets the system pressure setting is known as Integral Time, It, and is expressed in units of repeats per second.

Output Variable
(Valve Position) Full Scale

Slow Response

Pb high

0 Large Change

Full Scale

Fast Pb low Response

Output Variable
(Valve Position)

0 Small Change

If precise control of the specified discharge Input Variable (Actual - Set Point Pressures) pressure is required, the It set point should be set for a fast value. It is inversely related to valve life Figure 5: Proportional Band, Pb and directly related to valve cycling, therefore, as It decreases, valve life increases and cycling decreases. For the CMC controlling Centac and X-FLO compressors, It values are typically less than 1.00.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

8
Figure 6 shows the relative valve response over time for two combinations of Pb and It. As shown, when Pb is low and It is fast, valve activity is significant in both magnitude and frequency to obtain the desired set point. The other scenario, Pb is high and It is slow, has relatively little valve activity, and may never reach the set point position.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Opened Proportional Band - Low Integral Time - Fast

Set Point

Valve Activity

Proportional Band - High Integral Time - Slow

Discharge Pressure

Motor Current, MinLoad and MaxLoad Motor current, in units of power (normally amps), has two functions in the CMC. The first is over current protection for the main motor, and is referred to as MaxLoad or High Load Limit (HLL). The second function determines the point at which the bypass valve begins to modulate for

Power at Coupling

Up to this point, constant pressure control has been accomplished with an analog input (system pressure) and two analog outputs (inlet valve and bypass valve position). How is motor current, the other analog input, used for constant pressure control? When does the bypass valve modulate as opposed to the inlet valve?

MinLoad

Capacity - Mass Flow


Figure 7: MinLoad and MaxLoad

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

MaxLoad

Proportional Band and Closed Integral Time are variables used internally by the control system to determine valve response and direction for a given compressed air system. Each has an optimum value based upon the system's characteristics. Determining these optimum values is a trial and error exercise. These set points should be re-evaluated any time there is a major change in the compressed air system.

Time

Figure 6: Proportional Plus Integral Control


Tcold Thot

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


controlling pressure. This point is called MinLoad or Throttle Limit (TL). The location of these two points is graphically depicted on the pressure and power versus capacity curves as shown in Figure 7. MaxLoad or High Load Limit (HLL) setpoint, in units of amps, is a parameter entered into the CMC that prevents the main drive motor from overloading. Once this value is reached, the CMC logic limits the inlet valve from opening any further. This action constrains the motor by limiting the amp draw to the maximum allowable service factor amps by using the inlet valve MaxLoad PID loop to maintain the MaxLoad current setpoint. When the motor is sized for cold conditions, there are circumstances when MaxLoad will never be reached. For example, the value of MaxLoad as shown in Figure 7, cannot be attained for the T=hot curve because it is beyond the maximum compressor capability; that is, the inlet valve is fully open. This scenario never limits the inlet Bypass Valve Pressure PID valve.
Control Zone

Discharge Pressure

Inlet Valve Pressure PID Control Zone HLL TL

Inlet Valve MaxLoad PID Control Zone

Power at Coupling Amps

Inlet Valve MinLoad PID Control Zone

When ambient conditions produce the T=cold curve, the compressor will not be able to achieve the maximum capacity because it is beyond the MaxLoad value. Since MaxLoad is less than or equal to the motor nameplate FLA times the adjusted service factor, the maximum compressor capacity at T=cold could only be reached if the motor were sized for the T=cold condition.

MinLoad Control Setpoint in units of Capacity - Mass Flow amps is the power value at which the CMC transfers modulation control from the inlet to the bypass valve. The reason for this transfer is to prevent the compressor from entering into a surge condition. The bypass valve vents air to the atmosphere and maintains the pressure setpoint by using the bypass valve pressure PID loop. At the same time, the inlet valve maintains the MinLoad setpoint by using the inlet valve MinLoad PID loop; therefore, once the MinLoad setpoint is reached, the compressor continues to produce a constant amount of air. Part of this air goes to the Plant Air System, and the remainder is blown off. Even though the Plant Air System receives only a portion of the air produced, the amount of power remains constant.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

10

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


The following table presents seven capacity requirements for a plant air system. At each of the capacities, the table shows the compressor output, valve position, discharge pressure and power. Each of these values represents a percentage and is only an example. P2 is the specified discharge pressure and P0 is the barometric pressure.
System Require d Capacity 0 0 100 75 50 25 0 Compressor Operating State Off Unloaded Full Load MinLoad MinLoad MinLoad MinLoad Compress or Output Capacity 0 10 100 75 75 75 75 Open Position Inlet Valve 0 10 100 70 70 70 70 Bypass Valve 100 100 0 0 25 50 100 Discharge Pressure 0 >P0 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2

Power 0 20 100 80 80 80 80

From the table above, once the system required capacity moves below 75 percent, the compressor still produces 75 percent capacity with 80 percent of the power. If the system needs only 25 percent capacity, it will still have to pay for 80 percent of the power. This is why it is important to open the bypass valve at the last possible moment; therefore, setting MinLoad properly is critical for efficient energy management.

Surge Control
Surge is the reversal of flow within a dynamic compressor that takes place when the capacity being handled is reduced to a point where insufficient pressure is being generated to maintain flow. This condition can potentially damage the compressor if it is severe and is allowed to remain in that state for a prolonged period; therefore, control and prevention is required.

Control Methodology
Surge prevention is accomplished by opening the bypass valve prior to reaching the surge point. The point at which the bypass valve opens is MinLoad. By blowing a portion of the air to the atmosphere, the compressed air system gets the air that it demands. The compressor avoids surge because it is still producing a constant air capacity.

Surge Detection
Even though the CMC controls to prevent surge, it can still occur. Insufficient rise to surge, rapid changes in system discharge pressure, and various other reasons exist for a compressor to surge.

Insufficient Rise To Surge


Rise to surge is the percentage of the compressor's surge pressure to discharge pressure (see Figure 8). When an insufficient rise to surge situation exists, small fluctuations in the air system demand and ambient temperature can cause the compressor to surge. From Figure 8, when T=cold, there is sufficient rise to surge. As the ambient temperature increases to T=hot, the amount of rise to surge decreases because the discharge pressure is remaining constant and the natural curve is changing with temperature. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Typically sufficient rise to surge exists when a ten- percent rise to surge can be achieved for the hottest ambients that are expected for the site. If this design criterion is followed, the control system should be able to prevent surge for variations in air demand and inlet temperature. The same design methodology applies for changes in cooling water temperature for multi-stage compressors.

11

T=cold

Discharge Pressure

Rise To Surge

T=hot

Capacity

Figure 8: Rise To Surge

Changes in System Discharge Pressure


MinLoad corresponds to a specific constant discharge pressure; therefore, if the discharge pressure changes, MinLoad must be reset to properly control surge. As shown in Figure 9, when the discharge pressure is changed from point 1 to 2, a surge can occur at point 2 if MinLoad is not reset. Changes in system discharge pressure also apply, but more subtly, when the compressor begins to age. Dirty inlet filter elements and fouled coolers can change the compressor's natural curve; so MinLoad should be checked periodically to prevent surge from an incorrect setting.

TL 2 Discharge Pressure TL 1

Capacity - Mass Flow

Figure 9: Changes in Discharge Pressure

Rapid System Demand Changes


When the system demand varies rapidly over a wide range of capacity, the controller may not react fast enough to open the bypass valve to prevent surge. The CMC reads discharge pressure, motor amps, and approximately twenty other pressure and temperature inputs; plus controls the inlet and bypass valve position. The time required to do all of this approximately 100 milliseconds. When the controller is too slow to react, it is referred to as "driving through MinLoad". The only prevention for a situation like this is to set MinLoad at a more conservative value. The only negative implication to this is reduced energy savings, because the bypass valve is opened early.

Incorrect Instrumentation Output


If the instrumentation, defined in Figure 4, is improperly calibrated or gives inaccurate readings, the compressor could surge even though the CMC thinks it should not. Areas of 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

12

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


concern are insufficient power air, incorrect valve transducer calibration, and repeatability of both inlet and bypass valves. If the valves are being sent signals for specific movements and they do not respond by moving to the new positions, then the CMC has very little chance of correctly controlling surge, or even the discharge pressure. As discussed earlier, the CMC uses motor current as the standard method for determining when to open the bypass valve. The time to begin opening the bypass valve is near MinLoad amps. The equation,

GHP =

I V motor PF 3 746

indicates that horsepower is directly related to current; it is, but it is also related to voltage. This is not normally a concern because voltage is primarily constant. However, there are some locations where extreme voltage variations do exist. In these circumstances, the CMC cannot correctly determine when it reaches MinLoad and a surge can occur. For these applications, an optional watt transducer can be used to avoid this situation.

How is Surge Detected?


Note that it has been shown that even though the CMC has surge prevention logic, a surge can still occur. The CMC has a surge detection system comprised of a surge pressure transducer and motor current transformer (see Figure 10). The CMC senses surge when the rate of change in last stage discharge pressure and the rate of change in motor current are greater than the surge sensitivity setpoint value. When this occurs, the CMC will alarm and unload the compressor.
CMC
PT Bypass Valve

PT Pneumatic Tubing 4-20 mA CT Starter

Base Control Module

Check Valve

Motor

Compressor

4-20 mA

Inlet Valve

Figure 10: Changes in Discharge Pressure

Surge AbsorberTM
When the controller recognizes that a surge occurred, the compressor will unload. With the Surge AbsorberTM feature enabled, the controller will increment the bypass valve position by a fixed percentage, send the inlet valve to the MinLoad point (if it is not already there) and then let normal system demand reload to the operating pressure. This process will repeat up to three times within a ten-minute period. If the compressor surges four times in ten minutes, the compressor will remain unloaded until an operator presses the reset button. Each detected surge drives a Surge Event to the Event Log. If the compressor unloads do to repeated surges, a Surge Unload Alarm Event is driven to the Event Log. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Surge Indexing
Since the setting of MinLoad Control Setpoint is sensitive to many variables in a compressed gas system, there is potential for the setting to require adjustment throughout the operation of the compressor. When MinLoad is set incorrectly, one of two things can happen. When MinLoad is set too high, the compressor will consume excessive power at MinLoad. When MinLoad is set too low, the compressor is allowed to go past the surge line and surge occurs. When Surge Indexing is enabled, it corrects the MinLoad situation when MinLoad is Surge Index set too low by automatically Increment adjusting MinLoad to a higher value upon a surge. Discharge The indexed setting, Pressure MinLoad Control Setpoint will remain in effect until MinLoad Control Setpoint MinLoad User Setpoint MinLoad User Setpoint is (reset returns control here) manually changed on the Operator User Interface, or the Reset button is held for Power at MinLoad Control Setpoint #3 more than five seconds. Coupling (currently active) When MinLoad User Amps MinLoad Control Setpoint #1 Setpoint is manually MinLoad Control Setpoint #1 changed, the MinLoad Capacity - Mass Flow Control Setpoint is automatically changed to match the new setting and when reset the MinLoad Control Setpoint is reset to the original MinLoad. Entering a non-zero number into the MinLoad Surge Index Increment variable enables surge Indexing.

13

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

14

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Oil System Control


The CMC panel provides control of the prelube pump and lube oil heater in the starting sequence, during normal operation and after compressor stops or trips.

Prelube Pump
The prelube pump is started when the panel power is on and Seal Air is present. The prelube pump stops after the compressor start button is pushed and the programmable timer Start Time has expired. The pump does not come on again until the Stop key is pressed, and will remain on until the panel power is turned off or Seal Air is lost.

Oil Heater
The oil heater is thermostatically controlled. When the oil temperature is below the set point temperature, the oil heater is energized, above the set point temperature it is de-energized. The oil heater control does not have any interaction with the microprocessor board and is designed to operate with the control panel de-energized as long as three-phase power is available.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

15

Protection and Monitoring


Each CMC base module has twenty-three analog inputs, sixteen digital inputs, four analog outputs and sixteen digital outputs for control, protection and monitoring. These input functions provide the CMC with information about the compressor. The CMC board uses the output functions to communicate to the user and perform actions like starting the compressor and turning on the prelube pump. All of these inputs and outputs are required to interface physical actions to and from the electronics.

Analog Functions
An analog function is one in which an electrical signal represents a specific pressure, temperature, vibration and current input; or valve position output. As these inputs and outputs fluctuate, the electrical signal to and from the microprocessor board also fluctuates proportionally to the amount of change.

Analog Inputs
Twenty-one grounded and two floating analog inputs are used for protection, monitoring and control. Each input used for protecting the compressor is programmed for alarm and trip indication. Each of these functions is pre-programmed with the function title, engineering units, range, alarm and trip values, so no configuration is required upon receipt by the customer. The CMC uses pressure transmitters to measure pressure, resistance temperature detectors (RTD) and transmitters to measure temperature, eddy current based vibration transmitters to measure shaft vibration and a current transformer to measure the motor current. The CMC logic used for the protective alarm and trip functions is as follows: if the actual value of the input is greater than or equal to the alarm or trip value, indicate the condition. This logic is used for all inputs except, low oil pressure and temperature where the logic is reversed. To prevent nuisance alarms and trips, all standard analog inputs use an alternate alarm and trip value during the stopped, starting, and coasting states. The alternate setpoints cannot be edited through the Operator User Interface.

Analog Outputs
Two of the available four analog output functions are for inlet and bypass valve positioning. These are only output functions. The standard configuration for a CMC has no input information as to the valve location. The CMC calculates the position based upon where the valves are supposed to be and sends those signals to the valves.

Digital Functions
A digital function is one in which the presence of an electrical signal indicates ON or YES, and the lack of that signal represents OFF or NO. This is analogous to a light switch that has only two states, ON or OFF. The term "discrete" is also used instead of digital in many instances. The term that will be used throughout this documentation shall be digital.

Digital Inputs
The sixteen digital inputs provide status of field switches. Emergency Stop and Low Seal Air Pressure trip are standard. Any of these inputs can be configured as an alarm or trip. All inputs operate on 24 VDC power. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

16 Digital Outputs

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

The sixteen digital outputs are used by the CMC to start the prelube pump, energize the main starter contacts, indicate that an alarm or trip condition exists, indicate that the compressor is unloaded, activate the running unloaded shutdown timer and to sound the horn. Outputs can operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, single-phase power or 24 VDC power.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

17

Compressor Operating Methodology


In the following description of compressor operation, the term state is used to indicate what the compressor is doing, or mode of operation, at any given time. These operating states exist in a hierarchy. For example, the two highest level states are Stopped and Rotating. All other states exist at a level below these two states.

Compressor Operating States


Motor Driven Packages
+

Stopped
This state implies that the compressor is or NOT rotating. It is important to note that this is an implication only. If the instrumentation is not working properly or the system is setup improperly, the compressor could be rotating.

Compressor
+

Stopped Waiting Not Ready Ready

Waiting
After the panel power is energized, the controller starts the Waiting Timer and does not allow further User operation until after the timer expires. This timer is set at the factory for two minutes (120 seconds) and is not adjustable. This period allows the compressor prelube pump to circulate oil throughout the casing and prevents restarting while the compressor is coasting down during an electrical interruption.

Rotating Starting Unloaded A-D Unloaded Surge Unload Loading MinLoad Loaded Full Load MaxLoad Unloading

Not Ready

When in this state, the compressor is Not Ready To Start. This state is entered when the Waiting Timer has expired and any time Coasting that a compressor trip has been identified or a stop command has been issued. A very common and quite often overlooked reason for the compressor being Not Ready is when the Emergency Stop push button has been engaged. This state can exist indefinitely.

Ready
Similar to the previous state, this state could be redefined as Ready to Start. This state is entered when all compressor permissive functions have been satisfied. This state can exist indefinitely.

Rotating
This mode does not necessarily mean that the compressor is actually rotating. It means that it is rotating or rotation is pending and expected.

Starting
Any time after the compressor is ready and a start command is given, this state is entered. The goal for this period is to get the compressor to rated speed and running unloaded. Starting is allowed for only the Start Timer period and is adjustable. This time period is 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

18

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


limited to a maximum of one minute, or 60 seconds. The reason for the limit is to prevent the compressor from operating in the critical speed for an extended period. Stage vibration alarm and trip setpoints are increased during this period to get the compressor through the critical speed region. After the compressor has Started, the alarm and trip setpoints are adjusted back to their original values. The same procedure occurs for stage air temperature also. This state exits only after the Starting Timer has expired. THE COMPRESSOR IS ALWAYS STARTED UNLOADED. On exit of Starting, the compressor will return to the mode that it was in the last time it ran. For example, typical operation implies that prior to stopping the compressor, the Unload key is pressed. If this occurred, then the compressor will remain in Unload after starting. If the compressor is was running and tripped, the compressor will automatically return to the Loaded mode on exit of the Starting state. The User may also press the Load or Unload key prior to pressing the Start key to force the compressor to into either post-Starting state.

Unloaded
The compressor is in this state after a start (and Load Selected is not in effect) or when the User issues an unload command. A-D Unloaded and Surge Unload are also considered states. However, these two states are really just reasons for being in the Unloaded state. AD Unloaded means AutoDual Unloaded which occurs when AutoDual is enabled and the system pressure has been high enough for a long enough time to drive an unload command. Surge Unload is similar in that a surge event drives the unload command instead of AutoDual. These states can exist indefinitely.

Loading
When a valid load command is issued, the compressor will enter this state. This state exists until the MinLoad state is satisfied. The duration of this state depends upon PID settings for the inlet valve at the MinLoad state and the demand for air.

MinLoad, Loaded, Full Load and MaxLoad


These states transition among themselves as demand for air changes. MinLoad means that the bypass valve is controlling pressure and the inlet valve is maintaining the MinLoad Control Setpoint. Loaded means that the inlet valve is controlling pressure and the bypass valve is closed. Full Load occurs when the inlet valve has reached the full open or 100% position. MaxLoad means that the inlet valve is maintaining the MaxLoad Setpoint to prevent motor damage. In both the Full Load and MaxLoad states, system pressure will be lower than setpoint pressure.

Unloading
This state occurs when a valid Unload command is issued and will persist until the compressor reaches the Unloaded state.

Coasting
When a trip or any stop command is issued and the compressor is running, the motor will be de-energized and the compressor will begin to coast to a Stopped state. This state will remain as long as the adjustable Coast Timer is in effect. At the end of the timer, the compressor will enter either the Ready or Not Ready state.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

19

WARNING

Failure to set the Coast Timer for a period greater than or equal to the actual coasting time can result in compressor damage.

Compressor Operating States


The following diagrams graphically depict the states relative to valve position. This diagrams is provided to assist in the understanding of overall compressor operation.

Compressor Operating States


with Valve Position
Not Ready Ready Unloaded Unloading Unloaded Full Load MaxLoad Coasting Loading Starting MinLoad Loaded Waiting Loaded

System Pressure Setpoint

Inlet Valve
% milli amps

System Pressure

Bypass Valve
milli amps %

100

20

100

75

16

75

Unload

50

12

12

50

Tight Closure

25

16

25

4
Start

Load Inlet Valve Unload Position

20

Power On

Stopped

Rotating

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

20

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

User Interface
OUI (Operator User Interface)
User interface is defined as the means by which people interact with the compressor control system. The standard configuration of the CMC has two components of the user interface. They are the OUI and the device plate. The key component of "easy to use" is that there are only twelve buttons to press on the OUI and four buttons, lights, and switches on the device plate. The CMC OUI consists of six command buttons (Start, Stop, Load, Unload, Acknowledge and Reset), four navigation keys (Up, Right, Left and Down), an Edit mode selection key (Enter) and a Contrast key. These keys in conjunction with the 240x128-pixel graphics display make up the user interface to the compressor. The bezel that surrounds the OUI ensures that the NEMA 4 rating is maintained for the OUI.

CENTAC Microcontroller
SYSTEM System Pressure Pressure Setpoint INFO SETTINGS Inlet Valve Bypass Valve

Motor Current Running Hours 11445

105.3 105.0 173.4

95 0
12:00:00

22JUL96

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 1/2

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Command Keys
These keys command the compressor to perform actions as specified in the following table. When any of these keys are pressed the action will be logged in the event log. Key Name Acknowledge Function Silences the optional horn or acknowledges an alarm. Clears all trip latches. Required to be pressed after a trip condition to restart the compressor. Starts the compressor.

21

Reset

Start Stops the compressor. This button should be pressed instead of the E-Stop for normal operation. Engages Modulate or Autodual control mode. Unloads the compressor. Unload

Stop

Load

Enter Key - Display Operating Mode


The Enter key toggles the display between the NAVIGATION mode and the EDIT mode.

Navigation Keys
The arrow keys for Up, Right, Left and Down perform differently depending upon the current display-operating mode. FOLDER NAVIGATION To move among the tabbed folders, press the RIGHT or LEFT key. The folder list is circular; that is, when the SYSTEM folder is displayed and the LEFT key is pressed, the SETTINGS folder becomes active. The same is true when the SETTINGS folder is displayed and the RIGHT key is pressed, the SYSTEM folder becomes active. PAGE NAVIGATION To move among each folders pages, press the UP and DOWN keys. The page list is also circular. So, when page 1/4 (pronounced page 1 of 4) is active and the UP key is pressed, page 4/4 becomes active. Also, when page 4/4 is active and the DOWN key is pressed, page 1/4 becomes active. The current page for a folder is persistent. For example, if you begin on the SYSTEM folder page 2, change to the INFO folder and return to the SYSTEM folder, page 2 will be the page displayed.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

22 Contrast Key

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

This key changes the contrast of the backlight for the graphic LCD display. Pressing this key steps among each of the sixteen contrast levels. When stepped to the sixteenth level, pressing the key again returns to the first contrast level.

Graphic Display
The 240x128-pixel graphic display allows us to provide a flexible interface between the user and the compressor. The display has three distinct regions as shown in the diagram below.
Folders

SYSTEM System Pressure

INFO

SETTINGS Inlet Valve Bypass Valve

Page

Pressure Setpoint Motor Current

105.3 105.0 173.4

95 0
12:00:00

22JUL96

Status Bar

Loaded
Compressor Operating State

Load Selected Remote 1/2

Page Number

Compressor Control Location

Compressor Status

Graphics Display Area Definitions

Folder and Page


In the design of this system, it is important to provide much of the information required for operating and troubleshooting the compressor. The tabbed folder with multiple pages metaphor has been used to reduce the complexity of a traversing at least ten pages of information. For the standard design, the maximum number of keys required to get to any of the ten pages is four. The SYSTEM folder provides information about the compressor system, the INFO folder gives various types of information about the unit and the SETTINGS folder is used to perform compressor setup.

Status Bar
The Status Bar provides four distinct types of information (Compressor Operating State, Compressor Status, Compressor Control Location and Page Number). This region is always visible from any folder and page combination. This Field is displayed in large text so that the operator can determine the compressors current operating state at a glance. See Section titled Compressor Operating Methodology for a list of the messages provided. The Compressor Status Field messages are Trip, E-Stop (emergency stop button pressed), RMT-Stop (a remote stop has been pressed), Start Disabled (an optional permissive start condition has not been satisfied), Alarm, Unload Selected (the compressor will stay in Unload after Starting has been completed), and Load Selected (the compressor will go to Minload after Starting has been completed). 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


The Compressor Control Location Field messages are Local, Remote (remote hardwired commands i.e. start, stop, load, unload etc.), Network (MODBUS, DF1 or CEM communication with a UCM) and Remote/Net (both Remote and Network). This indication is provided to indicate to the operator that a remote location is in control of the compressor and the compressor may start, stop, load, unload, etc. without the local operator initiating any commands. These three fields combine to provide the operator with the necessary information to create a cursory determination of the status of the compressor. When a more thorough determination is required, the operator can get additional detail by looking through the other pages in the system. The Page Number indicates the current page for the current folder with the number of pages in the folder. The number of pages is given so that the user always knows where he is in the system.

23

Edit (Setpoint Changes) Mode


Pressing the Enter key to toggle from Navigation to Edit mode can change Setpoints for a page. Once in this mode, the highlight will move from around the folder name to item to be changed. Use the Right and Left arrow keys to move among the changeable items and the Up and Down arrow keys to change the value of the item. When changes are complete, press the Enter key again to return to Navigation mode.

Navigation Mode
Navigation mode is active when a folder name (SYSTEM, INFO or SETTINGS) is highlighted. When inactive, press the ENTER key to activate.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

24

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

SYSTEM Folder
SYSTEM System Pressure Pressure Setpoint Motor Current INFO SETTINGS Inlet Valve Bypass Valve SYSTEM

INFO Folder
INFO SETTINGS CONTRAST HORN SILENCE LEFT RESET START LOAD UNLOAD UP RIGHT DOWN ENTER STOP

SETTINGS Folder
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS *

105.1 105.0 323.4

100 0

Password * * * Setpoint Changes Enabled Language and Units English degF mils amps psi English degC mils amps kg/cm2 Date, yyyy/mm/dd Time, hh:mm:ss

Running Hours: 11445

Loaded
SYSTEM Stage 1 Stage 2 Oil INFO

31-AUG-1999 12:00:00 Load Selected Remote 1/4

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Event Name Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Reset key pressed Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Load key pressed Start key pressed

Load Selected Remote 1/3

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS MaxLoad (HLL) MinLoad User Setpoint (TL) Control Setpoint Surge Index Increment Surge Absorber Enabled Surge Sensitivity

1999/08/31 12:30:00 Load Selected Remote 1/6

SETTINGS Press 30.1 106.6 20.3 Temp 95.8 93.5 105.5 Vib 0.25 0.22

Time 09:18:44 09:18:43 09:18:34 09:08:43 08:58:23 08:24:01 08:23:12 Trip Remote

Date 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 2/3

400.0 100.0 100.0 1.0

9.0 Load Selected Remote 2/6

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO Digital Inputs Starter Feedback E-Stop Pressed Low Seal Air

Load Selected Remote 2/4 SETTINGS

Not Ready
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS Power On Hours Running Hours Loaded Hours Number of Starts

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS PB Inlet Valve Pressure MinLoad (TL) MaxLoad (HLL) Bypass Valve Pressure

12338 11445 11223 35

IT rep/sec 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

D sec 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

10.0 25.0 100.0 10.0

BCM Ver:

2.51 Load Selected Remote 3/3

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO Digital Outputs Prelube Pump Running CR1 Remote Trouble

Load Selected Remote 3/4 SETTINGS

Loaded

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS

Load Selected Remote 3/6

Control Mode Manual Modulate Autodual Reload Pressure, % of Setpoint Unload Point, BV % Open Unload Delay Time, seconds Load Selected Remote 4/4

98 1 1

Loaded
Navigation and Enter Keys

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS

Load Selected Remote 4/6

NAVIGATION MODE Navigation mode is active when a folder name (SYSTEM, INFO or SETTINGS) is highlighted. When inactive, press the ENTER key to activate. FOLDER NAVIGATION To move among the tabbed folders, press the RIGHT or LEFT key. The folder list is circular; that is, when the SYSTEM folder is displayed and the LEFT key is pressed, the SETTINGS folder becomes active. The same is true when the SETTINGS folder is displayed and the RIGHT key is pressed, the SYSTEM folder becomes active. PAGE NAVIGATION To move among the pages, press the UP and DOWN keys. The page list is also circular. So, when page 1/4 (page 1 of 4) is active and the UP key is pressed, page 4/4 becomes active. Also, when page 4/4 is active and the DOWN key is pressed, page 1/4 becomes active. The current page for a folder is persistent. For example, if you begin on the SYSTEM folder page 2, change to the INFO folder and return to the SYSTEM folder, page 2 will be the page displayed.

Starting Timer, seconds Coasting Timer, seconds CT Ratio Motor Failure Trip Enable Inlet Unload Position, % Setpoint Ramp Rate, pressure/scan

20 240 60 15.0 5.0

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS Stage 1 Temperature Stage 1 Vibration Stage 2 Temperature Stage 2 Vibration Oil Pressure High Oil Temperature Low Oil Temperature

Load Selected Remote 5/6

Alarm 120 0.80 120 0.75 18 120 100

Trip 125 1.00 125 0.95 16 125 95

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 6/6

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


SYSTEM Folder
The SYSTEM folder provides information about the compressor system. The number of pages in this folder is at least four; but could be more for two stage machines with special analog options purchased, or for compressors with three stages or SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS more. System Inlet This page shows the main compressor operating parameters, running hours, date and time. The Motor System Pressure and Pressure Current Setpoint are in units as defined by Running Hours: 11445 31-AUG-1999 12:00:00 the Settings page, Motor Current is Load Selected in Amps and valve positions are in Remote 1/4 percent open. Pressure Setpoint is always editable while the Inlet and System Folder Page 1: System Pressure Bypass Valve positions are edit enabled when in the Manual mode only. These are the only editable settings in any folder other than the Settings Folder.
Pressure Setpoint Bypass Valve Pressure

25

105.1 105.0 323.4

Valve

100 0

Loaded

Info Folder Page 1 Edit Parameters Table Variable Pressure Setpoint Inlet Valve Position (manual mode only) Bypass Valve Position (manual mode only) Units pressure percent percent Minimum Value 0.0 0 0 Maximu m Value 999.9 100 100 Step Size 0.1 1 1

The Analog Input page provides the actual value for each stage pressure, temperature and vibration, oil pressure and temperature. If additional analog inputs have been purchased or more stages exist as standard, it is likely that an additional page or pages will be added. The units are as defined by the Settings page. There are no changeable setpoints on this page. The Digital Input page shows the current state of the digital (discrete) inputs for the system. The number of inputs will vary depending upon the number of optional inputs purchased. A check in the box to the left of the text indicates a TRUE condition, whereas, no check indicates a FALSE condition. For example, a check mark in the EStop Pressed boxed means that the Emergency Stop push button has been 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

SYSTEM Stage 1 Stage 2 Oil

INFO

SETTINGS Press 30.1 106.6 20.3 Temp 95.8 93.5 105.5 Vib 0.25 0.22

Loaded
SYSTEM INFO Digital Inputs Starter Feedback E-Stop Pressed Low Seal Air

Load Selected Remote 2/4 SETTINGS

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 3/4

System Folder - Pages 2,3: Analog/Digital Inputs

26

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


pressed. It is possible to have multiple Digital Input pages.
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS

Digital Outputs Prelube Pump Running CR1 Remote Trouble

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 4/4

The SYSTEM folders four pages give the current operating status for the compressor. The User is always within two keystrokes of all operating parameters.

System Folder - Page 4: Digital Outputs

The Digital Output page is similar to the Digital Input page except that it shows the current state of the digital (discrete) outputs for the system. The number of outputs will vary depending upon the number of optional items purchased. A check in the box to the left of the text indicates a TRUE condition, whereas, no check indicates a FALSE condition. It is possible to have multiple Digital Output pages.

INFO Folder
The INFO folder contains the OUI key map, the compressor event log and the hour meters. There are no changeable setpoints in this folder. The OUI key map will be the default page on power up. The keys are labeled in English and the local language, depending upon the current language selected. The Event Log details the last two-hundred twenty four (224) events that have occurred. Each event has a date and time stamp. This log for all Alarms and Trips satisfies first-out indication. Any time an Alarm or Trip is indicated on the Status Bar, the detail for that fault is included here.
SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 INFO SETTINGS Time 09:18:44 09:18:43 09:18:34 09:08:43 08:58:23 08:24:01 08:23:12 Trip Remote Date 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 2/3 Event Name Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Reset key pressed Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Load key pressed Start key pressed

Not Ready

The event labeled as 1 is the Info Folder - Page 2: Scrollable Event Log newest event and 7 is the oldest event. For events that have identical Time and Date values, the order is still correct (newest to oldest, top to bottom). Once the list is full, each new event knocks off the last event. Pressing the Enter key to initiate Scroll Mode allows access to events 17 through 224. Scroll Mode is indicated by the reverse video of the event numbers. Each Down Arrow press displays the next seven events. An Up Arrow press will display the previous seven events. Any time a Trip occurs, the system will send the display to the first seven events.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

27

Possible Events List


Event Name * * End of List * * A/I Alarm A/I Trip Acknowledge (Location) Auto Start Auto Stop BCM 2 Failure Alarm BCM 3 Failure Alarm Compressor Started DI Alarm Discrete Surge DI Trip Edit-x AI Alarm SP Edit-x AI Trip SP Edit-x A/D Reload Pct Edit-x A/D Unload Dly Edit-x A/D Unload Pt Edit-x AHS Pressure Edit-x Auto Stop Time Edit-x BV Position Edit-x BV-PID D Edit-x BV-PID It Edit-x BV-PID Pb Edit-x Coasting Timer Edit-x CT Ratio Edit-x Day Edit-x IV Position Edit-x IV Unload Pos Edit-x IV-PID D Edit-x IV-PID It Edit-x IV-PID Pb Edit-x MaxLoad SP Edit-x MaxLoad-PID D Edit-x MaxLoad-PID It Edit-x MaxLoad-PID Pb Edit-x MinLoad Index Edit-x MinLoad SP Edit-x MinLoad-PID D Edit-x MinLoad-PID It Edit-x MinLoad-PID Pb Edit-x Month Edit-x PSP Ramp Rate Edit-x Sensitivity Edit-x Starting Timer Edit-x Sys Press SP Description Displayed for the event name whenever the event list is not full. The actual value for Analog Input AI is greater than the Alarm value. The actual value for Analog Input AI is greater than the Trip value. An Acknowledge command has been issued from Location. An automatic start occurred (typically from Auto Hot or Cold Start). An automatic stop occurred (typically from Running Unloaded Shutdown Timer). Communications have been lost to Base Control Module #2. Communications have been lost to Base Control Module #3. The compressor has started. The Discrete Input DI is in an alarm condition. A discrete surge switch has detected a surge. The Discrete Input DI is in a trip condition. The Analog Input AI Alarm setpoint value has been edited from location x . The Analog Input AI Trip setpoint value has been edited from location x . The AutoDual Reload Percent value has been edited from location x . The value has been edited from location x . The AutoDual Unload Point value has been edited from location x . The Auto Hot Start Pressure value has been edited from location x . The Auto Stop Timer value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Position value has been edited while in Manual from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Derivative value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Integral Time value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Proportional Band value has been edited from location x . The Coasting Timer value has been edited from location x . The CT Ratio value has been edited from location x . The Day value for the Date field has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve Position value when in Manual has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve Unload Position value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve Pressure PID Derivative value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve Pressure PID Integral Time value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve Pressure PID Proportional Band value has been edited from location x . The MaxLoad Setpoint value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve MaxLoad PID Derivative value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve MaxLoad PID Integral Time value has been edited from location x . The Inlet Valve MaxLoad PID Proportional Band value has been edited from location x . The MinLoad Surge Index Increment value has been edited from location x . The MinLoad Setpoint value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Derivative value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Integral Time value has been edited from location x . The Bypass Valve Pressure PID Proportional Band value has been edited from location x . The Month value for the Date field has been edited from location x . The Pressure Setpoint Ramp Rate value has been edited from location x . The Surge Sensitivity value has been edited from location x . The Starting Timer value has been edited from location x . The System Pressure Setpoint value has been edited from location x .

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

28
Edit-x Time Edit-x Year E-Stop pressed Load (Location) Loss of Motor Current MinLoad Clamped MinLoad Incremented MinLoad Reset Starting Fail Starter Failure Power Down Power Up Reset (Location) Start (Location) Starter Failure Stop (Location) Surge Surge Unload Alarm Unload (Location)

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


The Time value has been edited from location x . The Year value for the Date field has been edited from location x . Emergency Stop push button has been pressed. A Load command has been issued from network communications. Motor current feedback was lost while running. The MinLoad Control or User Setpoint value has been limited to the MaxLoad Setpoint value. The MinLoad Control Setpoint value has been incremented as a result of surge. The MinLoad Control Setpoint value has been reset to the MinLoad User Setpoint value. Driver feedback was not received after a Start command was issued. Feedback was not received from the starter after a Start command was issued. The Base Control Module (BCM) was de-energized. The Base Control Module (BCM) was energized. A Reset command has been issued from Location. A Start command has been issued from Location. Starter feedback was not received after a Start command was issued. A Stop command has been issued from Location. The controller has detected a Surge. The alarm condition when the compressor has unloaded as a result of multiple surges. An Unload command has been issued from Location.

NOTE 1: Location is replaced by Comm for communications network, Local for local compressor display and Remote for hardwired remote communications. NOTE 2: x is replaced by C for edits from a communication network and L for edits from the local display. NOTE 3: All Analog Inputs get edit local, edit communications, alarm and trip event messages. NOTE 4: All Discrete Inputs for Alarm or Trip get alarm and trip event messages.

This last INFO Folder page INFO shows the hour meters and SETTINGS SYSTEM number of starts. Power On Power On Hours 12338 Hours is the time that the panel Running Hours 11445 power has been on. The Running Loaded Hours 11223 Number of Starts 35 Hours is the amount of time that the compressor has been operating between each start and BCM Ver: 2.52 stop sequence. The Loaded Hours is the amount of time that Load Selected Remote 3/3 the compressor has been running and not running unloaded. It can also be defined as the number of Info Folder - Page 3: Hour Meters and Version hours that the inlet valve is not in the Inlet Unload Position. The Number of (Compressor) Starts is self-explanatory.

Loaded

NOTE Most electric motors are only rated for two cold starts or one hot start per hour. It is the operators responsibility not to exceed the electric motors limitation. The control system allows the compressor to be started when the compressor is ready, not the motor.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


The last item on this page is the Base Control Module Version number. This will be used by field personnel for quick reference to determine if newer software is available.

29

SETTINGS Folder
The SETTINGS folder is used for compressor setup. In this folder, the User will enter performance and control operating parameters, analog health monitoring settings for Alarm and Trip conditions, control mode selection, setpoint changes, password, and user interface language. This folder is the primary location for editing setpoints. The Password is used for determining whether Setpoint Changes can be made. The Password takes four numbers. If the Password is entered properly, Changes will be enabled (a check will be in the box); otherwise, they are disabled. This enabling and disabling applies to all changeable setpoints except, Pressure Setpoint, Throttle Limit, language selection and the Password, these items are always modifiable.
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS *

Password * * * Setpoint Changes Enabled Language and Units English degF mils amps psi English degC mils amps kg/cm2 Date, yyyy/mm/dd Time, hh:mm:ss

Loaded

1999/08/31 12:30:00 Load Selected Remote 1/6

Settings Folder - Page 1: Password, Language, Time

and Date Each control system is shipped with two languages and units of measure combinations. The first set is for the English language, pressures in units of PSIG, temperatures in units of degrees F and vibrations in units of mils. The other set will be localized for the customer. The default alternate language is English with Metric units. Language support will be provided as standard for English, all European languages required for the CE Mark, and Chinese. Others will be available as required and translations can be obtained. This system has the ability for any language because of the graphics display. Asian character support will require additional screens because these characters require four times the number of pixels. There are no limitations on the units of measure. Each analog input has its own scaling factor and offset.

The Date is set with three separate values (1) Year, including century (2) Month and (3) Day. The Time is also set with three values (1) Hour, (2) Minutes and (3) Seconds.
Settings Folder Page 1 Edit Parameters Table Variable Password Digit Date (Year) Date (Month) Date (Day) Time (Hour) Time (Minute) Time (Second) Units dimensionless years months days hours minutes seconds Minimum Value 0 1990 1 1 0 0 0 Maximu m Value 9 2089 12 31 23 59 59 Step Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

30

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


The Anti-surge Settings and Driver Over-Load Protection Page has all of the settings for controlling and detecting surge conditions and protecting the main driver from over load conditions. The MaxLoad (HLL) setpoint prevents the compressor driver from overloading. MinLoad User MaxLoad (HLL), amps 400.0 Setpoint (TL) is the value used to MinLoad determine what the initial value User Setpoint (TL), amps 100.0 Control Setpoint, amps 100.0 (before indexing) when the bypass Surge Index Increment, amps 1.0 valve begins constant pressure control in lieu of the inlet valve. Surge Absorber Enabled Surge Sensitivity 9.0 MinLoad Control Setpoint is the Load Selected actual value used to determine Remote 2/6 when the bypass valve begins constant pressure control in lieu of Settings Folder - Page 2: Anti-Surge and Driver Overthe inlet valve. This value equals the Load Protection MinLoad User Setpoint plus the number of surges times the index increment value. MinLoad Surge Index Increment is the value that the Control Setpoint is indexed after a surge has been detected. If the value for Surge Index Increment is equal to zero, Surge Indexing is disabled.
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS

Loaded

To reset the MinLoad Control Setpoint to the MinLoad User Setpoint, hold the reset key for at least five seconds. The indication that it has been reset will be in the event log. The event message MinLoad Reset will be displayed. Another indication is when the MinLoad User Setpoint value equals the MinLoad Control Setpoint value. The Surge Absorber Enabled checkbox allows the user to turn off or on the Surge Absorber feature. When disabled, the compressor will Unload on any surge condition. The Surge Sensitivity setting has a range from one (1) to ten (10) where one is not sensitive (a soft surge condition could exist without being identified) and ten is very sensitive (a soft surge condition would be identified). We ship the machine with a default value of nine (9). This setting will pick up most surge conditions.
Settings Folder Page 2 Edit Parameters Table Variable MaxLoad (HLL) MinLoad User Setpoint (TL) MinLoad Surge Index Increment Surge Sensitivity Units amps amps amps dimensionless Minimum Value 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Maximu m Value 9999.9 MaxLoad 9999.9 10.9 Step Size 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

NOTE MinLoad Control Setpoint is the power value used to determine when the bypass valve opens. MinLoad Control Setpoint will always be equal to or greater than the Throttle Limit value.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

31

CAUTION

The MaxLoad (HLL) value should not exceed the value determined in the section titled Setting MaxLoad. Failure to set this properly could result in damage to the motor.

CAUTION

When Surge Indexing is enabled and the compressor surges several times, the compressor will begin bypassing air sooner than when Surge Indexing is disabled. You should periodically reset the MinLoad Control Setpoint to prevent excessive air bypass.

CAUTION

Repeated surging can cause damage to the compressor; therefore, use caution when desensitizing the Surge Sensitivity setting.

The Control Parameters Page is SETTINGS SYSTEM INFO used for matching the control PB IT D system to the local application. rep/sec sec The Proportional Band (PB), Inlet Valve Integral Time (IT) and Derivative Pressure 10.0 0.50 0.00 (D) settings are provided for both MinLoad (TL) 25.00 0.50 0.00 the inlet valve and bypass valves. MaxLoad (HLL) 99.99 0.50 0.00 Bypass Valve This gives the controller precise Pressure 10.0 0.50 0.00 control for modeling the air Load Selected system over the entire operating Remote 3/6 range of the compressor. With this release, the Derivative Settings Folder - Page 3: Control Parameters (PID constant has been added to give Settings) even more capability to match the control system to the air system. However, we recommend that this value remain at zero unless you have full understanding of how this parameter works.

Loaded

Settings Folder Page 3 Edit Parameters Table Variable Each PB (Proportional Band) Units dimensionless Minimum Value 0.0 Maximu m Value 99.99 Step Size 0.1

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

32
Each It (Proportional Band) Each D (Proportional Band)

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


repeats/second seconds 0.0 0.0 99.99 99.99 0.1 0.1

CAUTION

Setting the Derivative parameter to a value other than zero for any of the PID settings may cause the valve output to change rapidly. Please change this value with caution.

The Control Mode Selection Page allows the User to select between the two standard control modes, Modulate and Autodual. This selection process is performed with the radio button selector. To change the selection, press the Up or Down arrow key. Reload Percent, Unload Point and Unload Delay Time are all setpoints for Autodual control.

SYSTEM

INFO

SETTINGS

Control Mode Manual Modulate Autodual Reload Pressure, % of Setpoint Unload Point, BV % Open Unload Delay Timer, seconds

98 1 1

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 4/6

Checking the Manual checkbox enables manual valve control. In this mode, the inlet valve may be stroked when the compressor is not running, and the bypass valve can be stroked at any time. If a surge condition occurs while manually controlling these valves, the CMC will automatically take over the valves.
Settings Folder Page 4 Edit Parameters Table Variable Autodual Reload Pressure Autodual Unload Point Autodual Unload Delay Timer Units % of Setpoint BV % Open seconds Minimum Value 0 1 0 Maximu m Value 99 99 999 Step Size 1 1 1

Settings Folder - Page 4: Control Mode Selection

CAUTION

Manual should only be used for compressor setup.

Starting Timer is the length of time prior to enabling the loading of the compressor. Typically, this time includes the starter transition time (Y-D time). When this timer expires, the prelube pump will turn off and the compressor is enabled for loading. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Coasting Timer is the length of time that it takes for the driver to stop rotating.
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS 20 240 60 15 5.0

33

Starting Timer, seconds Coasting Timer, seconds CT Ratio Motor Failure Trip Enable Inlet Valve Unload Position, % Setpoint Ramp Rate, pressure/scan

CT Ratio is the ratio of the current transformer primary to the secondary; i.e., if the CT primary winding is 300 and the secondary winding is 5, then the CT Ratio is 60. When checked, Motor Failure Trip Enable tests that the zero amp motor current has been reached after a start command has been initiated and that motor current is not lost while the compressor is running. Uncheck this box for dry

Loaded
run conditions.

Load Selected Remote 5/6

Settings Folder - Page 5: Miscellaneous

The Inlet Unload Position is the position of the inlet valve when in the unload state. Setpoint Ramp Rate is used to prevent system pressure overshoot during compressor loading. Additional settings will be added to this page for special features.
Settings Folder Page 5 Edit Parameters Table Variable Starting Timer Coasting Timer CT Ratio Inlet Valve Unload Position Setpoint Ramp Rate Units seconds seconds dimensionless percent pressure/scan Minimum Value 5 0 60 0 0 Maximu m Value 60 9999 9999 100 999.9 Step Size 1 1 1 1 0.1

WARNING

Failure to set the Coast Timer for a period greater than or equal to the actual coasting time can result in compressor damage.

The Alarm and Trip Settings Page provides the means for changing the analog health monitoring values. The number of inputs varies depending upon the number of compression stages and optional inputs. Additional pages will be added as needed after this

SYSTEM

INFO

SETTINGS Alarm 120 0.80 120 0.75 18 120 100 Trip 125 1.00 125 0.95 16 125 95

Stage 1 Temperature Stage 1 Vibration Stage 2 Temperature Stage 2 Vibration Oil Pressure High Oil Temperature Low Oil Temperature

Loaded
1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

Load Selected Remote 6/6

Settings Folder - Page 6: Alarm and Trip

34

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


page. All line items are changeable for the Alarm and Trip setpoints.

General Sequence of Operation


To start and load a compressor follow steps 1, 2, 3 and 4

CENTAC Microcontroller
SYSTEM System Pressure INFO SETTINGS Inlet Valve Bypass Valve

Press Reset "Ready"

Pressure Setpoint Motor Current

105.3 105.0 173.4

95 0
12:00:00

22JUL96

2 Look for 3 Press Start

Loaded

Load Selected Remote 1/2

4 Press Load
To unload and stop a compressor follow steps 5 and 6

5 wait 20 seconds 6 Press Stop

Press Unload,

Compressor Operating States


for Motor Driven Packages
Not Ready Ready Starting Unloading Unloaded Unloaded Full Load MaxLoad Coasting
Any Stops or Trips Start Unloaded Amps

Loaded

Loading

MinLoad

Waiting

Loaded

Motor Current
amps, %

Motor Full Load Amps Plus Service Factor

Unload

MaxLoad Setpoint Amps Motor Full Load Amps

100

Load

MinLoad Setpoint Amps

No Stops or Trips

Zero Amp Offset

0
Power On

Stopped

Rotating

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

35

Indicator, Switch and Light Layout


In addition to the CMC OUI there may be a variety of indicators, switches, and lights mounted on the control panel door. In conjunction with the CMC OUI these devices make up the User Interface for the CMC. A typical device layout consists of the following lights, push buttons, and selector switches.

Lights
The lights provided are the green CONTROL POWER ON light, which is integral to the CONTROL POWER OFF/ON switch, the amber PRELUBE PUMP RUNNING light and the red TROUBLE INDICATION light.

Push Buttons
The red EMERGENCY STOP push button stops the compressor any time that it is pressed. This push button is used to initiate a stop in the case of an emergency.

Switches
The CONTROL POWER OFF/ON selector switch turns the panel power on or off

CMC Tuning Procedures


When commissioning a new compressor, troubleshooting an existing compressor, or tuning a system, the following procedures may be required. The procedures are performed, and any changes required are made through the CMC OUI. For instructions on how to use the OUI refer to the section titled User Interface. The following figure will be referenced in the procedures.
PT 1 PT 2 Bypass Valve Block Valve

Pneumatic Tubing 4-20 mA CT Starter

Base Control Module

Check Valve

Motor

Compressor

Plant Air System 4-20 mA Inlet Filter Inlet Valve

Figure 11: Plant Air System

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

36

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Setting MaxLoad
The MaxLoad Setpoint keeps the motor within the allowable current range. To determine the value for MaxLoad, an Adjusted Service Factor (ASF) is multiplied by the motor full load amps (FLA). The (ASF) is found by obtaining the motor service factor from the motor nameplate and selecting the adjustment factor from the table below. The motor full load amps is found on the motor nameplate. Motor Service Factor 1.15 1.25 Example: FLA: Motor service factor: MaxLoad: MaxLoad = FLA X ASF 134 Amps 1.15 140 Adjusted Service Factor 1.05 1.10

Setting MinLoad
MinLoad establishes the minimum flow through the machine when loaded, it is the maximum point of inlet valve throttling. If system demand is below this throttle point, the compressor must bypass air or unload. If flow were allowed to go below MinLoad, the machine would eventually hit the surge line and surge. By stopping inlet valve throttling at MinLoad the machine is kept out of surge. To find the MinLoad setting, the machine is run into the surge line, and the value of load (amps, kilowatts, SCFM) at surge is recorded. The recorded value is then incremented by five percent and set as the value for MinLoad. 1. Before continuing this procedure, verify the following: a) The inlet and bypass control valves have been calibrated. b) The machine is running unloaded. c) The block valve at the inlet to the plant air system (Figure 11) is closed. d) The pressure setpoint is set to the pressure at which the machine is going to operate. 2. Set initial MinLoad estimates. a) In the Settings Folder, select the Edit Data cell for MinLoad. b) Increment or decrement the value to achieve a value of approximately 95% of full load amps. 3. Preset the manual bypass valve position to 100. a) On the OUI select the Settings Folder and enable manual valve control by highlighting the manual check box.

NOTE When Manual is enabled, both control valves can be positioned while stopped, while only the Bypass Valve can be positioned when Loaded.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

37

b) Switch to the System Folder Page 1 and press the Enter Key to enable edit mode. c) Use the horizontal navigation keys to select the bypass valve. d) Increment the value to position the valve to 100 percent. 4. Load the compressor by pressing the Load Key. 5. Find the throttled surge point. a) Slowly decrement the bypass valve position until the last stage discharge pressure equals the pressure setpoint. b) Allow the system to stabilize at MinLoad. It the system does not stay at MinLoad, slightly decrement the valve position to force the machine to throttle to MinLoad. c) Decrement (MinLoad) 2%. d) Verify the last stage pressure equals the pressure setpoint and adjust the bypass valve position if necessary. e) Repeat 5.2-4 until the compressor surges. 6. Increase MinLoad by five percent. 7. Exit MinLoad editing by pressing the Enter Key. 8. Unload the machine. 9. Disable manual valve control by unchecking the manual check box.

Setting MinLoad Surge Index Increment


When Surge Indexing is enabled (MinLoad Surge Index Increment is greater than zero), the Index Increment value is the amount added to the MinLoad Control Setpoint upon a surge. The MinLoad Control Setpoint will stop being incremented when and if the value reaches MaxLoad.

Setting Surge Sensitivity


The Surge Sensitivity setting should be set sensitive enough to detect a surge, yet not trigger on spurious noise in the system. To set the surge sensor the machine is forced to surge by running the machine at MinLoad and the MinLoad setpoint is dropped until the machine audibly surges. The process is repeated until the correct setting is found. 1. Before continuing this procedure, verify the following: a) The plant can tolerate a pressure disturbance when the machine surges. b) Surge Indexing (by placing MinLoad Surge Index Increment to zero) is disabled. c) Surge Absorber is disabled. d) The pressure setpoint is set to the pressure at which the machine is going to operate. e) The machine is running unloaded. 2. Set the initial Surge Sensitivity setting to 9. a) In the Settings Folder, select the Edit Data cell for Surge Sensitivity. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

38

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


b) Increment or decrement the value to achieve a setting of 9. 3. Press the Load Key. 4. Run the compressor at MinLoad at pressure. The machine can be forced to MinLoad and pressure by either: a) Running the plant at a higher pressure than pressure setpoint. b) Decreasing load in the plant. c) Verify the compressor is at pressure by observing the last stage pressure on Page 2 of the Settings Folder. 5. Find the throttled surge point. a) Select the MinLoad cell in the Settings Folder and slowly decrement the value until the machine surges. Typically the machine will make a puffing or popping noise upon surge, this is your indication surge has occurred. 6. Press the Unload Key. 7. Determine if Surge was recorded. a) Inspect the Status Bar. If the message Surge Unload is displayed surge was recorded, if the message is not displayed surge was not recorded. 8. Check the Surge Sensitivity setting. a) If the surge was recorded, the setting may be correct or the Surge Sensor may be too sensitive, skip to the too sensitive step, which follows. b) If the surge was not recorded, the setting is not sensitive enough, skip to the not sensitive enough step which follows. 9. Surge Sensor too sensitive. a) Select the Surge Sensitivity Setting in the Settings Folder. b) Decrease the value for Surge Sensitivity by 0.1. c) Press the Reset Key. d) Skip to step 11. 10. Surge Sensor not sensitive enough. a) Select the Surge Sensitivity Setting in the Settings Folder. b) Increase the value for Surge Sensitivity by 0.1. c) Press the Reset Key. 11. Repeat the procedure until the Surge Sensitivity setting is found which just catches a surge but does not miss a surge. a) Return to step 3. 12. Restore all values but Surge Sensitivity.

Tuning Stability
The CMC controls stability with four Proportion Integral Derivative (PID) control loops. When the machine is running above the MinLoad point and below the MaxLoad point, pressure is 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


regulated with the Inlet Valve Pressure control loop. When the machine is running at the MinLoad point, pressure is regulated with the Bypass Valve Pressure control loop and motor current is regulated with the Inlet Valve MinLoad control loop. When the machine is running at MaxLoad motor current is regulated with the Inlet Valve MaxLoad control loop. For each PID loop, Proportional, Integral and Derivative parameters are used to stabilize the system. For a definition of the parameters and their effect on stability, refer to the section titled How does Constant Pressure Modulation Work. The proportional and integral terms are labeled by their respective loops, Inlet Valve, Bypass Valve, MinLoad, and MaxLoad.

39

Calibrating the Control Valves


The purpose of this procedure is to position the inlet and bypass valves by opening and closing each valve from the CMC analog outputs. The valves should be adjusted to physically correspond with the valve positions displayed on the OUI. 1. Stop the compressor.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

40

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

NOTE Performing this procedure while the compressor is operating may cause serious damage.

2. 3. 4.

On the OUI enable Setpoint changes by entering the password on the Settings Folder. Verify the OUI status bar displays Ready or Not Ready. On the OUI select the Settings Folder and enable manual valve control by highlighting the manual check box. NOTE When Manual is enabled, both control valves can be positioned while stopped, while only the Bypass Valve can be positioned when Loaded.

5. 6. 7.

Switch to the System Folder Page 1 and press the Enter Key to enable edit mode. Use the horizontal navigation keys to select the valve requiring positioning. Use the vertical arrows to increment and decrement the valve position sent to the valve. NOTE For the Inlet and Bypass Valves, the displayed position corresponds to percent open.

8.

Disable manual valve control by blanking the manual check box.

Autodual Control Settings


For a detailed definition of the Autodual control mode refer to the section titled Control Methodology. The procedure for tuning Autodual requires the setting of the following variables:

Unload Point (Bypass Valve % Open)


The Bypass Valve Unload Point is selected to correspond to the check valve closing as shown in Figure 11, since at this point the machine is not supplying the system. This position is found by running the machine at MinLoad and monitoring the System and Discharge pressures. When the System pressure is 5% of setpoint greater than the last stage pressure as shown in the System Folder, the check valve is assumed to be closed.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Example: Given the following conditions the Unload Point would be set at 35. Variable Pressure Setpoint PT1 (system pressure) PT2 (last stage pressure) Bypass Valve Position Assumed check valve position Case 1 100 100 100 13 Open Case 2 100 100 94 35 Closed

41

1. Run the machine at MinLoad by elevating the system pressure no more than 3% or decrease the pressure setpoint no more than 3%. 2. Monitor the difference between the Discharge and System Pressures by using the System Folder Pages 1 and 2. 3. When the Discharge Pressure is approximately 5% of setpoint less than the System Pressure, record the Bypass Valve Position. 4. Enter the recorded Bypass Valve Position as the Unload Point.

Unload Delay Time (seconds)


The Unload Delay Timer should be set to prevent unloading during short excursions through the Unload Point. Typically, when the check valve closes, system demand requires the check valve to open again soon thereafter due to the demand being on the verge of requiring the compressor. If the compressor had unloaded when the check valve first closed, a reload would be immediately required and the machine would go through the automatic unload/load cycle until demand was consistently low enough to keep the check valve closed. For this reason, the timer is used to inhibit Unload until demand has consistently remained low. 1. Run the compressor at MinLoad by either: a) Running the plant at a higher pressure than pressure setpoint. b) Shedding load in the plant. 2. Determine delay time. a) Observe time when bypass valve first hits unload point. b) Observe time when bypass valve remains below unload point, typically less than 300 seconds. c) Enter the time difference as the Delay Time.

Reload Percent
The Reload Percent determines the System Pressure at which the machine will automatically load into the system. This value should be set according to the customers minimum acceptable system pressure.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

42

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Setting the Start Time


The Start Time is set to the transition time of a built-in reduced voltage starter or the acceleration time of a customer supplied starter. This procedure requires the Inlet Unload Position to have been set. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Initially set the Start Time to 25 Seconds. Caution: Damage to the starter contacts could result if starter transition occurs before the compressor is up to full speed. Stop the compressor. On the OUI record the time and press the start button. Wait for the compressor to stop accelerating and again record the time. Calculate the difference between the two values and enter as the Start Time.

Setting the CT Ratio


Locate the CT and find the rating, which is typically printed, on the side of the CT. Divide the primary by the secondary and enter the value as the CT Ratio. Example: CT is printed with 600:5, the value entered is 120.

Inlet Unload Position


The purpose of this variable is to set the inlet valve position when the machine is running unloaded. For a description of the Unloaded state refer to the section titled Unload. 1. If the inlet valve is a butterfly type, enter an initial value for Inlet Unload Position of 15. If the inlet valve is a inlet guide vane type, enter an initial value for Inlet Unload Position of 5. Start the machine. If during startup the motor trips on overload, is drawing what is considered excessive amperage or sounds labored, stop the machine and decrease the Unload Position by 2. Run the machine in the Unloaded state and monitor the first stage pressure. Adjust the Unload Position to achieve 1 PSIG on the first stage discharge, or until a positive pressure is felt at the first stage trap bypass. If the inlet air temperature is relatively cold, increase the setting 2%, this will accommodate hot day operation.

2.

3. 4. 5.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

43

Setting Set Point Ramp Rate


Setpoint ramp rate determines the rate at which the machine transitions from unloaded to loaded. The setting should be set as high as possible without creating excessive overshoot when the machine enters the system. 1. 2. Verify the machine is unloaded by the Unloaded message in the OUI Status Bar. Determine overshoot. a) Load the machine. b) Monitor the pressure overshoot. 3. If overshoot is excessive. a) Decrease the Setpoint Ramp Rate. b) Repeat step 2. 4. If overshoot is satisfactory and time to load is excessive. a) Increase the Setpoint Ramp Rate. b) Repeat step 2. 5. If overshoot is satisfactory and time to load is satisfactory the Setpoint Ramp Rate is correct.

Alarm and Trip Settings


The values for vibration, temperature, pressure etc. alarm and trip setpoints are located on the electrical schematic. These values determine when the controller will indicate an alarm or trip condition.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

44

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Troubleshooting
The following procedures provide direction on troubleshooting the CMC System, control panel, and associated instrumentation. Faults are either Event Logged, which means the fault is displayed in the INFO Folder on the OUI, or Non-Event Logged. The distinction helps to expedite the troubleshooting process. When a control system fault is suspected, the following diagram is used to categorize the fault. The section following the diagram breaks each category down into specific items, which can cause a particular fault.

A CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT IS SUSPECTED

THE FAULT IS LOGGED IN THE EVENT LOG.

THE FAULT IS NOT LOGGED IN THE EVENT LOG

COMPRESSOR RELATED
Event correctly indicates a problem. (Refer to the compressor operating manual)

I/O FAULT
Temperature, pressure, load, valve, etc. readings incorrect. (Refer to the Input/Output (I/O) System)

CONTROL PROBLEMS
Compressor fails to Load, fails to trip, fails to start, surging, etc. (Refer to the CMC Tuning Procedures section)

STABILITY PROBLEMS
Inlet valve, bypass valve, or control variables (mass flow, system pressure, Kw, amps) are unstable. (Refer to the CMC Tuning Procedures Section)

CONTROLLER PROBLEMS
OUI failed, BCM failed, UCM failed, Communications failed. (Refer to Controller Problems Section)

Figure 12: Troubleshooting Tree

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

45

Troubleshooting Example
The following example will serve as a guide to follow when troubleshooting specific problems.
SYSTEM INFO SETTINGS Time 09:18:44 09:18:43 09:18:34 09:08:43 08:58:23 08:24:01 08:23:12 Trip Remote Date 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 0720 2/3

Problem Indication: Plant air pressure is low and the CMC OUI is found as shown. Probable Cause Determination: 1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Event Name Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Reset key pressed Low Oil Pressure Trip Low Oil Pressure Alarm Load key pressed Start key pressed

Not Ready

The machine Tripped on Low Oil Pressure, which means the oil pressure, was below the Oil Pressure Trip Value. Figure 12 leads to the assumption that the problem is either compressor or I/O related, because the fault is Event Logged. There are two most likely causes for this event. a) Actual oil pressure is low. i) The prelube pump is found to be running and installation of a calibrated pressure sensor shows the actual oil pressure to be above the Oil Pressure Trip Value. Therefore, the mechanical system is operating correctly. The oil pressure value displayed on Page 2 of the System Folder shows the oil pressure to be below the test sensor reading and erratic. Additionally, all other analog input readings are normal and not erratic. Therefore, the problem can be isolated to the oil pressure, analog input circuit. The Pressure Monitoring System (PMS) troubleshooting table, found in the following section The Pressure Monitoring System identifies the probable cause for an erratic reading as a loose wire/terminal/connector and specifies Troubleshooting Procedure PMS #1 and 2 as the appropriate procedures.

b) The value read by the CMC is incorrect. i)

ii)

Trouble Procedure Execution: Step 1 of PMS #1 requires disconnecting of the pressure transducer (PT) wires at the transmitter. When this step is performed, one of the connections is found to be intermittent. When the poor connection is corrected, the erratic reading on the OUI becomes solid.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

46

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Input/Output (I/O) System


Vibration Monitoring System (VMS)
Description: The vibration transmitter is used to convert the proximity probe signal into a 4 -20 mA signal, which is monitored by the CMC. The system is based on a 15-foot (4.575 m) total electrical length. Component specifications: Transmitter: 100 mv/mil = 0.1 volt per 0.001 in (0.0254 mm) 4 mil (0.1016 mm) scale 4-20 mA output Gap setting 0.030 to 0.060 in (0.762 to 1.524 mm), 0.050 in (1.27 mm) is nominal gap Probe gap corresponds to 3 to 6 volts VDC, 5 VDC nominal Probe ohm value 7-12 ohms

Probe:

Troubleshooting: The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem Zero OUI readout (when compressor is running) Erratic OUI readout Incorrect OUI readout Probable Cause Open circuit/cable disconnected Loss of power to transmitter Malfunctioning transmitter Transmitter not calibrated Loose wire/terminal/connector Any Troubleshooting Procedure VMS #2, 3, 4 VMS #1 VMS #2 VMS #2 VMS #2, 3, 4 VMS #1, 2, 3, 4, 5

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Checking Vibration Transmitter Power 1. Connect a DC voltmeter to the + and - terminals of the transmitter. 2. With control power on, there should be approximately 24 VDC present at the terminals. 3. If approximately 24 VDC is not present; see the section titled Control Power System. NOTE: Under no circumstances should the vibration transmitter zero or span be adjusted. Calibration of the vibration transmitter requires special tooling and calibration fixtures. Contact the factory if calibration is required.
XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

47
VMS #1

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM

To BCM J1 Connector (See electrical schematic for point).


4 TO 20 mA 100 mV/MIL

COM

TEST

NON-CONTACT VIBRATION TRANSMITTER PART NO. 1X9247 S/N 4 100 PROBE XXXXXX

Vibration transmitter

20 mA =

INGERSOLL RAND

Checking Vibration Circuit 1. With control power on, check the dc voltage at the COM and TEST terminals on the transmitter. A reading of 3 to 6 VDC should be present [this corresponds to a 0.030 to 0.060 inches (0.762 to 1.524 mm)] probe gap. 2. If less than 3 volts is present the probe gap may be incorrect, or a short circuit may exist. Check the cable connections and cable. 3. If more than 6 volts is present the probe gap may be incorrect, or an open circuit may exist. Check the cable connections and cable. 4. If no voltage exists, the transmitter may be faulty. Remove control power and swap connections with another transmitter and test.
4 TO 20 mA 100 mV/MIL

VMS #2

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM

Compressor casing

Vibration transmitter

COM

TEST

NON-CONTACT VIBRATION TRANSMITTER PART NO. 1X9247 S/N XXXXXX 4 100

20 mA =

Vibration probe Probe extension cable

PROBE

INGERSOLL RAND

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

48

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Check the Vibration Probe, and Cable 1. Turn control power off and disconnect the probe extension cable from the transmitter. 2. Check resistance of the extension cable and probe together, the reading should be 7 to 20 ohms.
Probe connector

VMS #3

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

Probe cable

VAC

mA COM V

Compressor casing

Connect test lead to outer shell. Connect test lead to inner pin.

Probe extension cable Vibration probe

Checking the Vibration Probe 1. Turn control power off and disconnect the probe extension cable from the transmitter. 2. Check resistance of the probe alone, the reading should be 7 to 12 ohms.
Connect test lead to outer shell.

VMS #4

Probe connector

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

Probe cable
VDC mA

VAC

mA COM V

Vibration probe

Connect test lead to inner pin.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Check the BCM VMS #5

49

1. With control power off connect a 4-20 mA simulator at the input points of the suspected
faulty device at connector J1, (see electrical schematic for connection points). 2. Turn control power on and vary the signal. If the value tracks according to the table below, the wiring is faulty. 3. Verify the connector at J1 is fully seated. If the value does not track correctly, the BCM may be faulty.

BCM

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25
4-20 mA SURCE OR 2 WIRE SIMULATOR
mA OUT 2 WIRE OFF

Pin 1
XXXXXX MODEL CL-XXX
BATTERY CHECK

00.0% - 100%

555

LOOP ON

00.0%

DIAL

100%

mA percent (from simulator) 100% 50% 0%

Conversion chart Mils (on OUI) 4.0 2.0 0.0

mA (from simulator) 20 12 4

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

50 Temperature Monitoring System (TMS)


Description:

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

An RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector-2 Wire) with external transmitter is used by the CMC for temperature monitoring. An RTD resistance (ohmic value) varies with temperature. A transmitter for monitoring by the CMC analog input channel converts the resistance to a 420 mA signal. Component specification: Probe: 100 ohm Platinum resistance at 32 F (0C). Two types are used: The transmitter may be mounted in the RTD connection head fitting or in the control panel enclosure. The transmitter is supplied 24 VDC and outputs 4-20mA over a fixed range of either 0 to 200F (-17.7 to +93.3C) , or 0-500F (-17.7 to +260C). Transmitter:

Troubleshooting: The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem High OUI readout Probable Cause Troubleshooting Procedure TMS #4 TMS #3 TMS #2 TMS #3 TMS #3 TMS #2 TMS #3 TMS #4 TMS #2 TMS #3 TMS #3 TMS #2, 3 TMS #1, 2, 3, 4

High resistance connection Transmitter not calibrated RTD failure Transmitter failure Low OUI readout Transmitter failure RTD failure Transmitter not calibrated Erratic OUI readout Loose terminal connection RTD internal wire fault Transmitter failure Incorrect OUI readout Transmitter not calibrated RTD or transmitter failure Any

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Checking for Power to the Temperature Transmitter TMS #1

51

1. Disconnect the wires at terminals #1 and #2 on the transmitter and connect a voltmeter to these wires. 2. With control power on, there should be approximately 24 VDC present at the terminals. 3. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, see the section titled Control Power System.
BCM

J2 -Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1- Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25 Pin 1

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

123 4

VAC

m A COM V RTD Temperature transmitter

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

52
Checking for a Faulty RTD 1. Turn control power off. 2. Check ohms versus temperature. Use an Ohmmeter and the following tables to determine if the RTD is faulty. Vary the temperature to the RTD and check the ohms around the normal operating range.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


TMS #2

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM

Thermometer RTD 32 DEGF

Ice water

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

53

Degrees Fahrenheit versus Ohms value chart for 100 OHM Platinum RTD
F 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 0 93.01 95.20 97.38 99.56 101.70 103.90 106.10 108.20 110.40 112.50 114.70 116.80 119.00 121.10 123.20 125.40 127.50 129.60 131.70 133.90 136.00 138.10 140.20 142.30 144.40 146.50 148.60 150.70 152.70 154.80 156.90 159.00 161.00 163.10 165.20 167.20 169.30 171.30 173.40 175.40 177.50 179.50 181.50 183.60 185.60 187.60 189.70 191.70 193.70 195.70 197.70 1 93.22 95.42 97.60 99.78 102.00 104.10 106.30 108.40 110.60 112.70 114.90 117.00 119.20 121.30 123.40 125.60 127.70 129.80 132.00 134.10 136.20 138.30 140.40 142.50 144.60 146.70 148.80 150.90 153.00 155.00 157.10 159.20 161.30 163.30 165.40 167.40 169.50 171.50 173.60 175.60 177.70 179.70 181.80 183.80 185.80 187.80 189.90 191.90 193.90 195.90 197.90 2 93.44 95.63 97.82 100.00 102.20 104.30 106.50 108.70 110.80 113.00 115.10 117.30 119.40 121.50 123.60 125.80 127.90 130.00 132.20 134.30 136.40 138.50 140.60 142.70 144.80 146.90 149.00 151.10 153.20 155.20 157.30 159.40 161.50 163.50 165.60 167.60 169.70 171.80 173.80 175.80 177.90 179.90 182.00 184.00 186.00 188.00 190.10 192.10 194.10 196.10 198.10 3 93.66 95.85 98.04 100.20 102.40 104.60 106.70 108.90 111.00 113.20 115.30 117.50 119.60 121.70 123.90 126.00 128.10 130.30 132.40 134.50 136.60 138.70 140.80 142.90 145.00 147.10 149.20 151.30 153.40 155.40 157.50 159.60 161.70 163.70 165.80 167.80 169.90 172.00 174.00 176.00 178.10 180.10 182.20 184.20 186.20 188.20 190.30 192.30 194.30 196.30 198.30 4 93.88 96.07 98.26 100.40 102.60 104.80 106.90 109.10 111.20 113.40 115.50 117.70 119.80 122.00 124.10 126.20 128.30 130.50 132.60 134.70 136.80 138.90 141.00 143.10 145.20 147.30 149.40 151.50 153.60 155.70 157.70 159.80 161.90 163.90 166.00 168.10 170.10 172.20 174.20 176.30 178.30 180.30 182.40 184.40 186.40 188.40 190.50 192.50 194.50 196.50 198.50 5 94.10 96.29 98.47 100.70 102.80 105.00 107.10 109.30 111.50 113.60 115.80 117.90 120.00 122.20 124.30 126.40 128.60 130.70 132.80 134.90 137.00 139.10 141.20 143.30 145.40 147.50 149.60 151.70 153.80 155.90 157.90 160.00 162.10 164.10 166.20 168.30 170.30 172.40 174.40 176.50 178.50 180.50 182.60 184.60 186.60 188.60 190.70 192.70 194.70 196.70 198.70 6 94.32 96.51 98.69 100.90 103.00 105.20 107.40 109.50 111.70 113.80 116.00 118.10 120.20 122.40 124.50 126.60 128.80 130.90 133.00 135.10 137.20 139.30 141.40 143.50 145.60 147.70 149.80 151.90 154.00 156.10 158.10 160.20 162.30 164.30 166.40 168.50 170.50 172.60 174.60 176.70 178.70 180.70 182.80 184.80 186.80 188.80 190.90 192.90 194.90 196.90 198.90 7 94.54 96.73 98.91 101.10 103.30 105.40 107.60 109.70 111.90 114.00 116.20 118.30 120.50 122.60 124.70 126.90 129.00 131.10 133.20 135.30 137.40 139.60 141.70 143.80 145.90 147.90 150.00 152.10 154.20 156.30 158.40 160.40 162.50 164.60 166.60 168.70 170.70 172.80 174.80 176.90 178.90 180.90 183.00 185.00 187.00 189.00 191.10 193.10 195.10 197.10 199.10 8 94.76 96.95 99.13 101.30 103.50 105.60 107.80 109.90 112.10 114.30 116.40 118.50 120.70 122.80 124.90 127.10 129.20 131.30 133.40 135.50 137.70 139.80 141.90 144.00 146.10 148.20 150.20 152.30 154.40 156.50 158.60 160.60 162.70 164.80 166.80 168.90 170.90 173.00 175.00 177.10 179.10 181.10 183.20 185.20 187.20 189.20 191.30 193.30 195.30 197.30 199.30 9 94.98 97.17 99.35 101.50 103.70 105.80 108.00 110.20 112.30 114.50 116.60 118.80 120.90 123.00 125.20 127.30 129.40 131.50 133.60 135.80 137.90 140.00 142.10 144.20 146.30 148.40 150.50 152.50 154.60 156.70 158.80 160.80 162.90 165.00 167.00 169.10 171.10 173.20 175.20 177.30 179.30 181.30 183.40 185.40 187.40 189.40 191.50 193.50 195.50 197.50 199.50

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

54

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Degrees Celsius versus Ohms value chart for 100 OHM Platinum RTD
C -17.78 -12.22 -6.67 -1.11 4.44 10.00 15.56 21.11 26.67 32.22 37.78 43.33 48.89 54.44 60.00 65.56 71.11 76.67 82.22 87.78 93.33 98.89 104.44 110.00 115.56 121.11 126.67 132.22 137.78 143.33 148.89 154.44 160.00 165.56 171.11 176.67 182.22 187.78 193.33 198.89 204.44 210.00 215.56 221.11 226.67 232.22 237.78 243.33 248.89 254.44 260.00 0.00 93.01 95.20 97.38 99.56 101.74 103.90 106.07 108.22 110.38 112.53 114.68 116.83 118.97 121.11 123.22 125.37 127.50 129.62 131.74 133.86 135.97 138.08 140.18 142.29 144.39 146.48 148.57 150.66 152.74 154.82 156.90 158.98 161.05 163.11 165.17 167.23 169.29 171.34 173.39 175.44 177.48 179.51 181.55 183.58 185.60 187.63 189.65 191.67 193.68 195.69 197.69 0.62 93.22 95.42 97.60 99.78 101.95 104.12 106.28 108.44 110.60 112.75 114.89 117.04 119.18 121.32 123.43 125.58 127.71 129.83 131.95 134.07 136.18 138.29 140.39 142.50 144.59 146.69 148.78 150.87 152.95 155.03 157.11 159.18 161.25 163.32 165.38 167.44 169.49 171.55 173.59 175.64 177.68 179.72 181.75 183.78 185.81 187.83 189.85 191.87 193.88 195.89 197.89 1.23 93.44 95.63 97.82 100.00 102.17 104.34 106.50 108.66 110.81 112.96 115.11 117.25 119.39 121.53 123.65 125.79 127.92 130.04 132.16 134.28 136.39 138.50 140.60 142.71 144.80 146.90 148.99 151.08 153.16 155.24 157.32 159.39 161.46 163.52 165.59 167.64 169.70 171.75 173.80 175.84 177.88 179.92 181.95 183.98 186.01 188.03 190.05 192.07 194.08 196.09 198.09 1.85 93.66 95.85 98.04 100.22 102.39 104.55 106.71 108.87 111.03 113.18 115.32 117.47 119.61 121.75 123.87 126.01 128.13 130.26 132.38 134.49 136.60 138.71 140.81 142.92 145.01 147.11 149.20 151.28 153.37 155.45 157.52 159.60 161.67 163.73 165.79 167.85 169.90 171.96 174.00 176.05 178.09 180.12 182.16 184.19 186.21 188.24 190.25 192.27 194.28 196.29 198.29 2.47 93.88 96.07 98.26 100.43 102.60 104.77 106.93 109.09 111.24 113.39 115.54 117.68 119.82 121.96 124.08 126.22 128.35 130.47 132.59 134.70 136.81 138.92 141.02 143.13 145.22 147.32 149.41 151.49 153.58 155.66 157.73 159.80 161.87 163.94 166.00 168.06 170.11 172.16 174.21 176.25 178.29 180.33 182.36 184.39 186.41 188.44 190.46 192.47 194.48 196.49 198.49 3.09 94.10 96.29 98.47 100.65 102.82 104.98 107.14 109.30 111.46 113.61 115.75 117.90 120.04 122.17 124.30 126.43 128.56 130.68 132.80 134.91 137.02 139.13 141.24 143.34 145.43 147.53 149.61 151.70 153.78 155.86 157.94 160.01 162.08 164.14 166.20 168.26 170.32 172.37 174.41 176.46 178.49 180.53 182.56 184.59 186.62 188.64 190.66 192.67 194.68 196.69 198.70 3.70 94.32 96.51 98.69 100.87 103.04 105.20 107.36 109.52 111.67 113.82 115.97 118.11 120.25 122.39 124.51 126.65 128.77 130.89 133.01 135.12 137.24 139.34 141.45 143.55 145.64 147.73 149.82 151.91 153.99 156.07 158.15 160.22 162.29 164.35 166.41 168.47 170.52 172.57 174.62 176.66 178.70 180.73 182.77 184.80 186.82 188.84 190.86 192.87 194.88 196.89 198.90 4.32 94.54 96.73 98.91 101.08 103.25 105.42 107.58 109.73 111.89 114.04 116.18 118.32 120.46 122.60 124.73 126.86 128.98 131.10 133.22 135.34 137.45 139.55 141.66 143.76 145.85 147.94 150.03 152.12 154.20 156.28 158.35 160.42 162.49 164.56 166.62 168.67 170.73 172.78 174.82 176.86 178.90 180.94 182.97 185.00 187.02 189.04 191.06 193.08 195.09 197.09 199.10 4.94 94.76 96.95 99.13 101.30 103.47 105.63 107.79 109.95 112.10 114.25 116.40 118.54 120.68 122.81 124.94 127.07 129.20 131.32 133.43 135.55 137.66 139.76 141.87 143.97 146.06 148.15 150.24 152.33 154.41 156.49 158.56 160.63 162.70 164.76 166.82 168.88 170.93 172.98 175.03 177.07 179.11 181.14 183.17 185.20 187.22 189.25 191.26 193.28 195.29 197.29 199.30 5.56 94.98 97.17 99.35 101.52 103.69 105.85 108.01 110.16 112.32 114.47 116.61 118.75 120.89 123.03 125.16 127.28 129.41 131.53 133.65 135.76 137.87 139.97 142.08 144.18 146.27 148.36 150.45 152.54 154.62 156.69 158.77 160.84 162.91 164.97 167.03 169.08 171.14 173.19 175.23 177.27 179.31 181.35 183.38 185.40 187.43 189.45 191.46 193.48 195.49 197.49 199.50

NOTE: This chart converted from Fahrenheit chart using formula C= ((F-32)/1.8)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

55

Checking the RTD Transmitter 1. With control power off, connect a 100-ohm resistor to terminals #3 and #4 of the transmitter. 2. Turn control power on, the OUI reading should be 32F (0C) 10%. 3. If the reading is not within specification, the transmitter may be faulty.

TMS #3

BCM

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25 Pin 1

123 4

100 OHM

Temperature transmitter

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

56

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring

TMS #4

1. Ensure control power is off. At the affected RTD transmitter, disconnect the wires at transmitter terminal #1 and #2. Connect a 4-20mA source to these terminals (Observe correct polarity). Power up the control panel and then vary the simulator output. 2. At 12 mA (50%) the OUI should read 1/2 the RTD transmitter range; 100 or 250F (37.7 or 121.1C). The readout should change as the simulator output is varied. 3. If the reading on the OUI is incorrect or does not change, turn control power off and reconnect the 4 to 20 mA simulator at the respective terminals at connector J1, (see electrical schematic for connection points). 4. Turn control power on and observe the OUI readout while varying the 4-20mA. If the reading is correct there is an open or short in the wire or terminals connecting the CMC to the RTD transmitter. If reading is not correct the BCM may be faulty.

BCM

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25
4-20 mA SURCE OR 2 WIRE SIMULATOR
mA OUT 2 WIRE OFF

Pin 1
XXXXXX MODEL CL-XXX
BATTERY CHECK

00.0% - 100%

555

LOOP ON

00.0%

DIAL

100%

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Valve Control System (VCS)
Description: The BCM generates a 4-20 mA signal for valve control. The signal is wired to the I/P (current to pressure) transducer for conversion to a pneumatic signal for positioning the inlet or bypass control valve. Specification: 4-20mA input = 3 to 15 psi output 60 to 120 PSIG instrument air input to I/P

57

Troubleshooting: The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem IV or BV not operating Probable Cause Failure of BCM Positioner or actuator malfunction Failure of I/P Troubleshooting Procedure VCS #1 VCS #2 VCS #2

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

58

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring

VCS #1

1. With control power off, lift the wires at J3 for the suspected circuit and install a test meter capable of reading milliamps as shown below, (the pin numbers are found on the electrical schematic). 2. Restore control power. 3. If the meter reads 4 mA , the BCM is satisfactory. 4. If 4 mA is not present, refer to the section titled Control Power System. 5. Restore connections. 6. Remove control power. 7. Lift wires at suspected I/P, and install meter as in previous step. 8. Restore control power. If the meter reads 4 mA, the BCM and wiring is satisfactory.

BCM

J3 -Analog Outputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-4 J1- Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 1

Pin 25 Pin 1

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM V

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

59

Checking proper operation of the I/P and positioner

VCS #2

1. Connect a 4-20 mA simulator to the I/P. 2. Ensure instrument air is present at the supply connection on the I/P. 3. Vary the simulator between 4-20 mA. The output of the I/P and the positioner should follow. If the valve tracks the 4-20 mA signal correctly the I/P and the positioner are satisfactory.

BATTERY CHECK

LOOP ON

mA OUT OFF 2 WIRE

100% DIAL 00.0%

XXXXXX MODEL CL-XXX


00.0% - 100% INGERSOLL-RAND
Centrifugal Compressor Division Highway 45 South Mayfield, KY. 42066 Parts Service (800) 247-8640

4-20 mA SURCE OR 2 WIRE SIMULATOR

555

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

60 Pressure Monitoring System (PMS)


Description:

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

A Pressure Transducer (PT) is used to convert pressure (psi) to a 4-20 mA signal for monitoring by the CMC. Component specification: 0-50 PSIG (344.75 kPa) range 0-200 PSIG (1379 kPa) range Power = 24 VDC The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem Zero OUI readout Probable Cause Open circuit/cable disconnected Loss of power to transmitter Malfunctioning transmitter Erratic OUI readout Loose wire/terminal/connector Incorrect OUI readout Any Troubleshooting Procedure PMS #1, 2 PMS #1 PMS #3, 4 PMS #1,2 PMS #1, 2, 3, 4

Troubleshooting:

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

61

Checking for Power to the Pressure Transmitter

PMS #1

1. Ensure control power is off. Disconnect the wires at the suspect PT and connect a voltmeter to these wires. 2. With control power on, there should be approximately 24 VDC present at the terminals. 3. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, see the section titled Control Power System.

BCM

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25 Pin 1

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

SPAN

VDC

mA

VAC

INGERSOLL RAND

mA COM V

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

62

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Checking proper operation of the BCM and wiring PMS #2 1. Ensure control power is off. Disconnect the wires at the suspect PT and connect a 4-20 mA source to the lifted wires (Observe correct polarity). 2. Restore control power and then vary the simulator output. 3. At 12 mA (50%) the OUI should read 1/2 the PT range. The readout should change as the simulator output is varied. 4. If the reading on the OUI is incorrect or does not change, turn control power off and reconnect the 4 -20 mA simulator at the respective terminals at connector J1, (see electrical schematic for connection points). 5. Turn control power on and observe the OUI readout while varying the 4-20 mA. If the reading is correct there is an open or short in the wire or terminals connecting the CMC to the PT. If the reading is not correct the BCM may be faulty.

BCM

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

Pin 25
4-20 mA SURCE OR 2 WIRE SIMULATOR
mA OUT 2 WIRE OFF

Pin 1
XXXXXX MODEL CL-XXX
BATTERY CHECK

00.0% - 100%

555

LOOP ON

00.0%

DIAL

100%

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

63

Quick check of the PT 1. Connect an ohmmeter to the disconnected wires coming from the PT. 2. If there is no continuity either the wiring or the PT is faulty.

PMS #3

M
XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM

V
SPAN

INGERSOLL RAND

Functional PT test

PMS #4

1. Remove control power. 2. Remove the PT and connect a regulated air supply to the pressure connection. Power up the CMC and vary the regulated air supply. The OUI should read the pressure being applied.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

64 Digital Input System (DIS)


Description:

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

The digital input devices associated with the CMC are on/off devices that turn on or off the associated CMC digital input. Typical digital device name and type: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Low seal air pressure (Pressure) Low cooling water flow (Flapper) Low oil level (Float) High condensate level (Float) Dirty inlet filter (Differential pressure) Dirty oil filter (Differential pressure) High motor temperature (Thermistor)

Troubleshooting: The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem False alarm or trip Probable Cause Faulty device Faulty wiring Troubleshooting Procedure DIS #1 DIS #1

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Checking proper operation of the digital devices DIS #1 1. Verify approximately 24 VDC is present as described in the section titled Troubleshooting the Power System. 2. If approximately 24 VDC is present, install a multimeter with VDC selected between J4 or J5 pin1 and the input pin (the input pin can be determined from the electrical schematic, or wire number). 3. Ensure the digital device is not in the trip condition, the meter should read 0 VDC. 4. Actuate the switch, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC.
J6-RS232 Serial Data Link (Display), Female DB9 BCM

65

J5-Digital (Discrete) Inputs (24 VDC), Channels 9-16


Pin 1

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

J4-Digital (Discrete) Inputs (24 VDC), Channels 1-8


Pin 1

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

VDC

mA

VAC

mA COM V

Seal Air Switch J3-Analog Outputs (4-20mA) Channels 1-4

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

66

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Control Power System (CPS)


Description: The control power system provides 24 VDC to the CMC system for processing logic, displaying data, and monitoring instrumentation. The 24 VDC power supply feeds the Base Control Module (BCM) at connector J10. Overcurrent protection and power distribution are performed as shown below:

J2 +24 VDC pins 11 thru 14 Return pins 7 thru 10 Power Supply


F1

J1

AC2 pin 3 BCM shown cover removed AC1 pin 1

Fuse 5A/250VAC, normal blo. J12-Digital Output Power 120 or 220 VAC (Pin 1)

To OUI J2 pin 2

To OUI J2 pin 1

OUI Power

To Ground Bar

J10-Power Input (24 VDC)


F103 F102 F101 F100

J9-Current Transformer (0-5 amp)

CPU Power All BCM Fuses are 5x20mm, GMA 1.5 amp, Fast Blow Digital Input Power J4 & J5 - Digital Input Power 24 VDC (pin 1) Analog Input/Output Power

BCM

LEGEND: Trace Wire

J3- Analog Output Power 24 VDC (pins 2 & 8)

J1- Analog Input Power 24 VDC (pin 26)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Power Supply: Input power: 85-132 VAC, or 180-264 VAC (auto-selecting input), 2.5A RMS max, 47-63 Hz. Output power: 24 VDC, 4.3 A maximum at 50 C. The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem All analog inputs are zero or negative on System Page

67

Troubleshooting:

OUI displays: INGERSOLL-RAND Centrifugal Compressor Division OUI is black

Probable Cause Troubleshooting Procedure No AC power CPS #1 No DC power CPS #2 No analog input CPS #5 power No CPU power CPS #8 BCM problems No AC power No DC power No OUI power No AC power No DC power No digital input power No AC power No DC power No digital output power No AC power No DC power No analog output power CMCS #3 CPS #1 CPS #2 CPS #7 CPS #1 CPS #2 CPS #3 CPS #1 CPS #2 CPS #4 CPS #1 CPS #2 CPS #6

Event Log indicates all digital alarms and trips active

All digital outputs not working

All analog outputs not working

No AC power CPS #1 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VAC between pins 1 and 3 at connector J1 on the power supply. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read 120 VAC or 220 VAC depending upon the rated supply power. The rated supply power can be verified from the electrical schematic.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

68

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

No DC power CPS #2 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pins 11-14 and 7-10 at connector J2 on the power supply. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check F1 on the power supply, if fuse is good, the power supply may be faulty. 4. Ensure control power is off. 5. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pins 1 and 2 at connector J10 on the BCM. 6. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check the wiring between the power supply and the BCM. No digital input power CPS #3 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pin 1 at connector J4 on the BCM and the ground bar. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check F103 on the BCM, if F103 is good, check for DC power. No digital output power CPS #4 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VAC between pin 1 at connector J12 on the BCM and the ground bar. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read 120 VAC or 220 VAC depending upon the rated supply power. The rated supply power can be verified from the electrical schematic. No analog input power CPS #5 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pin 26 at connector J1 on the BCM and the ground bar. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check F102 on the BCM, if F102 is good, check for DC power. No analog output power CPS #6 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pin 2 at connector J3 on the BCM and the ground bar. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check F102 on the BCM, if F102 is good, check for DC power. No OUI power CPS #7 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Install a multimeter set for VDC between pins 1 and 2 at connector J1 on the OUI. 3. Restore control power, the meter should read approximately 24 VDC. If approximately 24 VDC is not present, check F101 on the BCM, if F101 is good, check for DC power. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


No CPU power CPS #8 1. Ensure control power is off. 2. Verify approximately 24 VDC is present at J10. 3. Check F100, if F100 is blown the BCM must be replaced, not the fuse. 4. If F100 is not blown, and the BCM is not functioning, the BCM must be replaced.

69

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

70

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Controller Problems
Description: The CMC System is generally comprised of a Base Control Module (BCM), Operator User Interface (OUI), and Power Supply (PS). There are few user serviceable components within the system, however, a brief understanding of the system will help in overall troubleshooting. All components require 24 VDC and rely on hardware and software to perform correctly, if the problem cannot be isolated to a power problem it is most likely a hardware or software problem, which will require Ingersoll-Rand support to correct. Component Specification: VDC power required Software required

Troubleshooting: The following table identifies typical problems, probable causes, and appropriate procedures for verifying the probable cause: Typical Problem BCM fault suspected OUI is dim OUI is black OUI displays INGERSOLL-RAND Centrifugal Compressor Division OUI displays Status XXH Where XX is a specific number Probable Cause No power Wrong contrast selected Backlight failing No power Cable disconnected Many Troubleshooting Procedure CMCS #4 CMCS #1 CMCS #1 CMCS #2 CMCS #3 Refer to Status Codes under System Information Section. CMCS #5 Refer to the UCM Section.

MODBUS communications problem No power Many

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


BCM Problems
BCM is not controlling CMCS #4 1. Check the CPU power as described in the section titled The Control Power System.

71

OUI Problems
OUI is dim CMCS #1 1. Depress the contrast key to step to the desired brightness. 2. Replace the OUI backlight as described in the section titled Backlight Replacement Procedure. If the backlight does not fix the problem the OUI may be faulty. OUI is black CMCS #2 1. Check for OUI power as described in the section titled The Control Power System. If approximately 24 VDC is present the OUI may be faulty. OUI displays INGERSOLL-RAND Centrifugal Compressor Division 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the cabling between OUI J1 and BCM J6. The BCM may require programming. Check the BCM CPU power. The BCM may be faulty. CMCS #3

UCM Problems
All UCM LEDs are not lit 1. Check for approximately 24 VDC at pins 1 and 2 at J3 on the UCM. 2. If power is present at J3 the UCM may be faulty. CMCS #5

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

72

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Options
This section details the various standard options that are available for the CMC. Some of the options listed are provided standard on some models, and will be indicated as such.

Enclosures
The CMC has three panel enclosures available; NEMA 12 (IP 64) which is standard, and optional NEMA 4 (IP 65) and NEMA 4X (IP 65). The panel is machine mounted. All electrical devices are mounted and wired where practical.

NEMA 12 (IP 64)


NEMA 12 is the standard enclosure for all compressors with CMC panels. NEMA defines this rating as "... intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping non-corrosive liquids. They shall meet drip, dust, and rustresistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation. Typically this type of enclosure is applied for most indoor applications.

Cooling Fan
The cooling fan is supplied on all standard CMC enclosures, where a wye-delta motor starter is present, the Control Electrical Package is included, or the ambient temperature exceeds 40C keeps the internal temperature below the maximum operating temperature allowed. This action effectively extends the operating life of the control components. A filter and gasket are added to attain a NEMA 12 rating.

NEMA 4 (IP 65)


This optional enclosure type is applied for most outdoor applications. Indoor applications that are subject to hose washing would also apply to this standard. NEMA defines this rating as "... intended for indoor and outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose directed water; and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They shall meet hose down, external icing, and rust-resistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation or internal icing." The standard panel enclosure is replaced with a new box that meets the above requirements. The User Terminal vinyl overlay and sealing bezel is door mounted and allows direct interface with the environment. NEMA 4 rated lights, switches and buttons are mounted directly through the panel door. A panel space heater and Vortex Tube Cooler are added to accommodate changes in ambient temperatures.

NEMA 4X (IP 65)


Also an optional enclosure type that should be applied in the same type of NEMA 4 applications within corrosive environments. The basic difference between NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X is that the panel enclosure is constructed with stainless steel.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Space Heater
Required for NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X panels to protect the panel from internal condensation. This option should also be used with NEMA 12 for unheated building applications.

73

Vortex Tube Cooler


This panel cooler is required on NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X enclosures to maintain the operating temperature below the maximum. An adjustable thermostat is provided to open and close a solenoid operated valve from the instrument air header in the panel. The cooler works by converting filtered compressed air into a hot air stream and cold air stream. The hot air stream is vented external to the enclosure and the cold air stream is directed into the enclosure.

Type Z Purge
The CMC requires a Type Z Purge when the customer environment is Division 2. A Type Z Purge reduces the classification within an enclosure from Division 2 too non-hazardous. When provided, a NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosure is required. Hand valve selectable quick and slow purges, with flow meters are provided to regulate the amount of gas entering the panel. A differential pressure switch is wired to a light on the front of the panel to indicate if there is a loss of purge gas. A relief valve is installed to prevent over-pressurization and a warning label, text below, is affixed to the front of the panel. WARNING

Enclosure shall not be opened unless the area is known to be non-hazardous or unless all devices within the enclosure have been de-energized. Power shall not be restored after the enclosure has been opened until combustible dusts have been removed and the enclosure re-pressurized.

Fused Control Power Disconnect


As a safety precaution, this option removes power from the panel before the door is opened. By turning the rotary door handle, the panel power is terminated. If the disconnect is to include fuse size provisions for the main motor starter, additional information is required. The disconnect would have to be mounted external to the panel enclosure. The short circuit capacity, maximum ground fault, motor full load amps, motor locked rotor amps and motor voltage must be known to size the disconnect properly. Pricing varies depending upon the size, amp rating of the fuse, which is required for protection. NOTE This option does not make fuse size provisions for the main motor starter.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

74

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Control Electrical Package


The Control Electrical Package consists of a Control Transformer, Prelube Pump Starter, Oil Heater Contactor(s) and Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor. This option allows the customer to bring a single source of electrical power to the compressor to run all of the compressor package accessories; thereby, making compressor installation easier.

Stage Data Package


For monitoring of interstage pressure and temperatures, the Stage Data Package can be added. As standard, the CMC comes with temperature readout, alarm and trip for the next to last compression stage and compressor discharge pressure indication. When selected, each stage gets temperature and pressure measurements on the downstream side of each stage's cooler. For compressors without built-in aftercoolers, the last stage diffuser temperature is measured. Each temperature has readout, alarm and trip capability while the pressures are readout only.

Alarm Horn
The optional alarm horn sounds any time there is an alarm or trip situation. The horn output will pulse for an alarm and remain constant for a trip. This allows the operator to distinguish between each fault type without viewing the OUI. The horn silence push-button is located on the CMC faceplate to silence any audible devices connected to the CMC board.

Running Unloaded Shutdown Timer


The intent of this option is to save energy by shutting the compressor off during extended periods of unloaded operation. When the running unloaded shutdown timer is enabled with the RUNNING UNLOADED SHUTDOWN TIMER DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch, the auto-dual control mode should be selected, this provides for automatic unloading of the machine during periods of low demand.

Water Solenoid Post Run Timer


This optional panel function is used to shut off water flow to the air and oil coolers after the compressor is stopped. It is accomplished by sending a signal to close the solenoid operated water valve(s).

Panel Mounted Wye-Delta Starter


Main motor starter enclosed in the CMC panel. This feature allows the customer to wire the compressor from a single source; thereby, eliminating most electrical wiring and starter installation expense. These starters are available for compressors with motors up to 350 HP and 575 Volts.

N.O. Contact for Remote Indication of Common Alarm and Trip


A normally open contact for individual remote indication closes whenever an alarm or trip occurs. This allows a customer to have remote indication of compressor alarm, trip or both.

Power Regulating Constant Voltage Transformer


If the electrical power supplied to the CMC varies more than ten percent, this transformer must be added to bring the voltage within the specification requirements. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

75

Automatic Starting
NOTE Most electric motors are only rated for two cold starts or one hot start per hour. It is the operators responsibility not to exceed the electric motors limitation. The control system allows the compressor to be started when the compressor is ready, not the motor.

Remote start and stop through hard wiring to the compressor control panel, communicating through the MODBUS port via RS422/485, Auto-Hot Start and Auto-Cold Start are the four options for automatically starting and stopping with the CMC. With each of these options a REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED or REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED, selector switch is provided on the device plate with a REMOTE ENABLED light. Since each option performs basically the same function, only one should be purchased for a single CMC. The specific method selected depends upon the application.

Remote Start and Remote Stop Hardwired


When this option is purchased, two digital inputs are configured on the CMC Base Control Module, one for remote start and one for remote stop.

Remote Start Digital Input


This input is driven by a momentary contact closure of at least 120 milliseconds. For the start to proceed, the panel power must be on, the compressor must be in the Ready state (all utilities must be running and permissive functions satisfied) and the REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is in ENABLED mode prior to energizing the input.

Remote Stop Digital Input


This input is driven by a maintained contact closure. The remote stop input is always active; that is, the remote stop can be initiated regardless of the REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch position.

Communications
Remote starting and stopping can be accomplished through the MODBUS communication port in various ways. See the section on Communications that follows for these options. Again, panel power must be on, all utilities must be running and permissive functions satisfied in order for the start-up to proceed.

Auto-Hot Start
Normally purchased in multiple compressor applications where backup air is required, this automatic starting option allows the compressor to be started when the system air pressure is below a user selected set point pressure. Panel power must be on, all utilities must be running, the AUTO HOT START DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch must be in the ENABLED position and all permissive functions satisfied in order for the start-up to proceed. Solenoid water valve(s) are provided for the intercooler(s) to reduce water consumption when the compressor is not running. A 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

76

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


post run timer is also included in the Auto Hot Start logic to de-energize the water solenoid valves twenty minutes after a compressor stop or trip to allow the oil to cool.

Auto-Cold Start
This option is very similar to Auto-Hot Start with the exception that the compressor starts with no initial panel power. An additional timer is added to simulate the start button being pressed and another timer is added to bypass the low oil temperature function on start-up. One additional solenoid valve is included for instrument air supply. The CONTROL POWER OFF/ON selector switch label is modified to CONTROL POWER LOCAL/OFF/COLD START. When in the COLD START position, the compressor is OFF and can be started through the Auto-Cold Start function. As a safety precaution, an optional strobe light can be provided to indicate that an automatic start is about to begin.

Remote 4-20 mA Pressure Setpoint


When the REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is in the ENABLED position, the CMC will monitor the specified analog input for pressure setpoint. If this analog inputs value minus the Pressure Setpoint (from the display) is greater than or equal to the displays Pressure Setpoint step value (default 0.1 psi), a remote setpoint change will be requested. This request will be initiated, as long as there are no analog input error faults for this channel, and the change made will rounded to the nearest step value (0.1) size. This methodology prevents the control system from chasing an ever-changing analog input value.

Steam and Gas Turbine Driven Compressors


The following describes the differences between the motor and turbine driven compressor logic.

Performance Control Motor Current, MinLoad and MaxLoad


Steam and gas turbines do not have motor current, MinLoad and MaxLoad operate differently form the normal motor driven compressor. MinLoad uses an inlet valve position, instead of amps, to determine when to transition from Inlet Valve Pressure control to Bypass Valve Pressure control. When in MinLoad, the controller uses this valve position as the setpoint for the Inlet Valve MinLoad PID loop. Since the controlled variable and the setpoint variable are identical, the goal of tuning this loop is to get a steady output. The default parameters will satisfy most all applications. The procedure for determining the MinLoad point is the same for both motor and turbine driven units, except inlet valve position is recorded instead of motor amps. CAUTION Improperly tuning MinLoad PID values will result in unpredictable compressor operation. If this situation arises, reset the PID values to the default values.

MaxLoad situations are detected on turbine driven compressors by low speed. The MaxLoad setpoint is a speed below the rated speed and above the low speed alarm. This speed is determined by adding an offset to the low speed alarm. This offset is the speed that the governor can accurately control. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Surge Control
All surge related issues are identical to motor driven units with the exception of the detection methodology.

77

How Surge is Detected


The CMC senses surge when the rate of change in last stage discharge pressure is greater than the surge sensitivity setpoint value. The difference between this and motor driven units is that the motor driven units uses rate of change in motor amps also.

Compressor Operating Methodology


Comparing the chart to the right for Turbine driven compressor and Motor driven compressor, the only state differences are the addition of the first three states under Rotating. These are Accelerate-1, Accelerate-2 and Slow Rolling.

Compressor Operating States


Turbine Driven Packages
+

Compressor
+

Stopped Waiting Not Ready Ready

Accelerate-1
This state is provided to give the operator five minutes from the time the Start button is pressed to get enough steam to the turbine to get the speed above the Zero Offset Speed. This speed is defaulted to 15 rpm. If this speed is not achieved in this time period, the event message Accelerate-1 Fail will appear and the controller will trip the compressor. As always, the compressor must be Ready before the start button is pressed. The reason for the five-minute limitation is to prevent the compressor from being ready for an indefinite period of time. This prevents the operator from forgetting that the compressor is ready to accelerate. Accelerate-1 could also be explained as accelerating to zero speed offset or waiting for compressor rotation.

Rotating Accelerate-1 Accelerate-2 Slow Rolling Starting Unloaded A-D Unloaded Surge Unload Loading MinLoad Loaded Full Load MaxLoad Unloading Coasting

Accelerate-2
After the transition to Accelerate-1 is complete, this state is initiated when rotation is detected and the turbine has not reached the low trip speed. This state may be bypassed if the turbine accelerates very quickly. Once in this state, a sixty (60) second timer is initiated. If the speed does not get to the minimum slow roll speed within this time period, the event message Accelerate-2 Fail will appear and the controller will trip the package. This state is limited sixty (60) seconds to prevent bearing damage from rolling the compressor at too low a speed. The bearing design requires a minimum speed to form the oil film thickness required for proper bearing 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

78

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


operation. Accelerate-2 could also be explained as accelerating to minimum slow roll speed.

Slow Rolling
After the transition to Accelerate-2 is complete, this state is entered after the previous sixtysecond timer has elapsed and the speed is less than the low trip speed. The compressor can operate in this Slow Rolling state indefinitely. While in this state, if the speed drops below the minimum slow roll speed, the event message Slow Roll Fail will appear and the controller will trip the compressor. If at any time during Slow Rolling the speed exceeds the maximum slow roll speed, the compressor will transition to Starting. The Starting state for turbine driven compressors is the same as for motor driven compressors.

Quick Start Turbines


Quick Start turbines may skip Accelerate-2 and Slow Rolling or just Slow Rolling because of the acceleration characteristics. The acceleration sequence depends upon the acceleration characteristics for a given turbine.

Operator User Interface (OUI) Status Bar


Motor driven compressors have an optional Compressor Status Field for Start Disabled. This field is standard for turbine driven compressors and it means that the turbine trip and throttle valve limit switch has not been made.

System Folder
Replacing Motor Current with Compressor Speed on Page 1 is the only modification to this folder.

Info Folder
The events Starter Failure and Loss of Motor Current have been deleted from the possible event list. The following events have been added.

Possible Events List


Event Name Accelerate-1 Fail Accelerate-2 Fail Driver Trip Governor Common Trip High Speed Alarm High Speed Trip Illegal Rotation Low Speed Alarm Low Speed Trip Slow Rolling Fail Starting Fail TTV Switch Fault Description The zero offset speed has not been achieved before the end of the five-minute timer. The minimum slow roll speed has not been achieved before the end of the one-minute timer. The trip and throttle valve limit switch has been latched, then unlatched. The governor has tripped. The indicated speed is greater than or equal to the High Speed Alarm setting. The indicated speed is greater than or equal to the High Speed Trip setting. Rotation has been detected when in Stopped. The indicated speed is less than or equal to the Low Speed Alarm setting. The indicated speed is less than or equal to the Low Speed Trip setting. The minimum slow roll speed was not maintained during Slow Roll. The low trip speed was not achieved before the end of the Starting Timer. The trip and throttle valve (TTV) limit switch is made when the (TTV) solenoid is deenergized.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Settings Folder
For Page 2, Anti-Surge and Driver Over-Load Protection 1. MaxLoad (HLL), amps is replaced with MaxLoad (HLL), rpm. 2. User Setpoint (TL), amps is replaced with User Setpoint (TL), IV Pos %. 3. Control Setpoint, amps is replaced with Control Setpoint, IV Pos %. 4. Surge Index Increment, amps is replaced with Surge Index Increment, IV Pos %. For Page 5, Miscellaneous 1. CT Ratio is removed. 2. Motor Failure Trip Enable checkbox is removed.

79

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

80 General Sequence of Operation

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Compressor Operating States


for Turbine and Diesel Driven Packages
Not Ready Ready Unloaded Unloading Unloaded Full Load MaxLoad Coasting Loading Starting MinLoad Waiting Loaded

Mechanical Trip (110%) Overspeed Trip (108%) Overspeed Alarm (105%) Rated "Full Load" (100%) MaxLoad (HLL) Low Alarm (95%) Low Trip (93%)

Any Stops or Trips

SPEED

Maximum Slow Roll (50%)

Minimum Slow Roll (25%)

No Stops or Trips and Latch

Start

Zero Speed Offset (15 rpm) (0%)


Power On

Stopped

Rotating

Starting Methodology
1. The panel power is turned on. The compressor is WAITING. 2. The CMC Panel mounted switch for DRIVER SPEED RATED/IDLE (when supplied for an electronic governor) should be put into the IDLE position. This switch is wired to a discrete input (Driver Speed Rated/Idle) in the CMC and is sent on the discrete output (Driver Speed Rated/Idle) to the governor. 3. When the two-minute waiting timer has expired, the compressor is NOT READY.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

81

4. Reset the governor to clear any trip signals. This may be accomplished with the digital output (Reset Momentary). If an electronic governor exists, a discrete output signal (Common Trip) is sent from the governor to a discrete input signal on the CMC when the governor needs to trip the compressor. If no electronic governor exists, a jumper must be installed on the CMC board.

Adaptive StartingTM Techniques


Low Trip (93%) Starting Starting Starting

SPEED
Slow Rolling Maximum Slow Roll (50%) Accelerate-2 Minimum Slow Roll (25%) Accelerate-1 Zero Speed Offset (15 rpm) (0%) Accelerate-1 Accelerate-1 Accelerate-2

5. When NO Trips exist (compressor and turbine), the CMC energizes the turbines trip and throttle valve (TTV) solenoid. This is accomplished through a discrete output (Driver Permissive) from the CMC to the TTV solenoid. 6. At this point, the compressor is NOT READY, Driver Disabled. 7. When the TTV solenoid is energized, the turbine trip valve can be latched. 8. When the turbine trip valve is manually latched, the turbine trip valves limit switch will be energized. This signal is sent to a discrete input (Trip and Throttle Valve Limit Switch) on the CMC. 9. When the limit switch is energized and no stop command is pending, the compressor will be READY. This state may be maintained indefinitely. 10. The Start Key is pressed on the compressor. The digital output (CR1) is energized to actuate the solenoid operated steam valve and the digital output (Start Momentary) is energized. A timer (five minute maximum) is started. At this point, enough steam should be applied to the turbine to get the speed above the zero speed offset. This period is ACCELERATE-1. 11. Once the zero speed offset has been established, a one minute timer is provided to prevent compressor pinion damage from rotating the pinions at too low a speed for an excessive time. The compressor bearings are designed to have a minimum oil film pressure created by a minimum rotating pinion speed. Therefore, we must not stay at

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

82

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


too slow a speed for an extended period. This is ACCELERATE-2. The turbine must reach the Minimum Slow Roll Speed (approximately 25% of Full Speed) to continue. 12. Once the turbine gets past the Minimum Slow Roll Speed and is less than the Maximum Slow Roll Speed (approximately 50% of Full Speed), the turbine is in the slow rolling zone and the compressor is SLOW ROLLING. The User may leave the compressor in this mode indefinitely. The CMC monitors the compressor speed (through the speed analog input) in this mode. The Idle/Rated Driver Speed switch is turned to the Rated position. 13. When the turbine speed exceeds Maximum Slow Roll Speed, the Starting Timer begins (60 seconds maximum) and is STARTING. This is the same time for motor driven compressors; therefore, the User must put enough steam to the turbine to get the speed above the low trip speed before the timer expires. At this point, the compressor has started and runs as described elsewhere.

Instrumentation for Turbine Driven Compressors


Centac Microcontroller
Discrete Outputs (DO) CR1 TTV Solenoid Energize (Driver Permissive) TTV Limit Switch Start - Momentary Stop - Momentary Reset - Momentary Driver Speed Rated/Idle DI DO Common Trip

Discrete Inputs (DI)

Electronic Governor
AO Speed AI

Driver Speed Rated/Idle Switch on Panel Door Analog Input (AI)

Speed

Turbine TTV Solenoid Manual Latch Limit Switch Steam Trip Valve Throttle Valve Solenoid Steam Valve

Compressor

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

83

Diesel Driven Compressors


Diesel driven compressors have similar characteristics as the turbine driven compressors. The differences are 1. Idle/Rated Driver Speed discrete input and discrete output are eliminated. 2. Start Momentary, Stop Momentary and Reset Momentary discrete outputs are eliminated. 3. Driver Permissive discrete output is wired to the Trip and Throttle Valve Limit Switch discrete input.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

84

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Communication
Customers may want to communicate to the CMC control systems for remote compressor control and monitoring. This communication capability provides for flexibility in the customer's compressed air operation through remote start and stop, data gathering for preventative maintenance, and incorporation into plant-wide control system. The major avenue for communicating with the CMC is via MODBUS protocol over an RS422/485 hardware link. This requires hardware for the control panel, and a communications device with the appropriate driver software to perform the desired panel functions. The RS422/485 interface can communicate with any serial device that has an RS422 or RS485 port. The customer or his representative must write system software to suit his individual needs for remote control and monitoring. Since the customer writes this interface, the system can be as flexible as the customer desires.

Centac Energy Master (CEM)


CEM is a pre-written, software package available for compressors with CMC panels. This software features Controlled Surge Reset and Reload, Compressor Rotation, Automatic Timed Logging of Compressor Data, Event Logging of Trip, Alarm, and Surge, Load Sharing and Adaptation to Compressor Loading Schedule. Even with this feature rich set of capabilities, some users may want more or different options. For example, some users might want to display multiple compressors on a single screen, but currently each compressor is on a separate screen (see CEM Instruction Manual for details). A user might want to log specific data rather than all data. The options are endless. Adding each of these features requires reprogramming and testing (custom programming). Currently, these custom modifications are not available.

Direct CMC Communications with RS422/485


For the descriptions that follow, a serial device can be a Personal Computer (PC), Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Distributed Control System (DCS) or any other device that can transmit, receive and interpret an RS422/485 formatted signal over a hardware link. In the descriptions that follow, the PC and PLC serial devices are not specific to manufacturers or operating systems. There are many ways of interfacing to CMC control systems through an RS422/485 port. Most of the following methodologies are currently available; but please be aware, other possible configurations can exist. All RS422/485 interfaces require custom interface software and custom application software. The interface software allows a specific serial device and operating system to transmit, receive and interpret data from a CMC control system. The application software tells the CMC control system what to do; for example, start compressor when ready, stop compressor after midnight and retrieve the current data and save to a disk file. Currently there are hundreds of different serial devices using different operating systems and languages in the industrial equipment world. Therefore, the practicality of having an interface for many systems is limited. Custom interfaces must be written as required by the hardware and operating system used. The capabilities of the hardware and the imagination of the developer only limit the application software. For example, one developer may have two compressors. In this 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


application the developer wants a screen to display the compressor interstage pressure and temperatures for both machines with various other compressor data. A second developer has five compressors. He also wants to display the same data, but this time for all five machines. The only way this is done is through changing the application software (custom modification). The developer may write functions to read and display data, log that data to some magnetic media for storage, change compressor set points, sequence the compressors for efficient operation and network additional devices, such as pumps, dryers, etc., into the system. All of these functions require specially written application software for the intended use.

85

The CMC-MODBUS Interface


Introduction
The CMC can communicate with other devices over a variety of communications standards. Supported standards, or protocols, include RS-232, IRBUS (Ingersoll-Rand Proprietary), and Modicons MODBUS. The built-in ports on the CMCs optional Universal Communication Adapters access communications. The CMC-MODBUS Interface defines the message structure that a CMC uses to exist on a MODBUS network. This interface will allow the MODBUS network to gather information and control the compressor. NOTE Unless specified otherwise, numerical values (such as addresses, codes, or data) are expressed as decimal values in the text of this section. They are expressed as hexadecimal values in the message fields of the examples.

In order to communicate over other types of networks, a network adapter must be used. The information presented in the following sections does not include MODBUS protocol details like framing messages and calculating checksums. This detailed information can be obtained from Snyder Automations MODBUS PROTOCOL Manual, Chapters 1 through 6. This can be obtained through the Internet at www.modicon.com.

Query

Master
Device Address Function Code Data Address Data CRC

Slave
Device Address Function Code Byte Count Data CRC

Serial Modes
MODBUS Controllers can be setup to communicate on MODBUS networks using either of two transmission modes: ASCII or RTU. The CMC supports only the RTU mode. The user must specify the serial port communication parameters (baud rate, parity mode, etc.) during configuration of each CMC. The mode and serial parameters must be the same for all devices on a MODBUS network.

Response

Figure 13: MODBUS Messages

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

86 MODBUS Messages

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

A MODBUS network uses a master-slave relationship. The CMC always acts as a slave device. The slave cannot initiate a message, and returns a message (response) only to queries (reads) that are addressed to them individually. For example, a force coil command (write to module) that is broadcast to all MODBUS devices would not get a response. Responses are not returned to broadcast writes from the master.

Device Address
This address is the physical address of the Universal Communication Module (UCM) for the compressor. This address must be unique in the MODBUS network. The valid range for this address is 01-FF (hexadecimal). NOTE: 00 (hexadecimal) is reserved for broadcast. Configuration of the slave address is available through the Ingersoll-Rand Service Tool and will be provided by a certified Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative.

Function Code
The listing below shows the function codes that are supported by the CMC. Additional detail about each function is provided in sections that follow.
Function Code (decimal) 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 Function Code (hex) 01 02 03 04 05 06 0F 10 Function Name

Read Coil Status Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Force Multiple Coils Preset Multiple Registers

Data Addresses
Addresses that contain the data type and a four-digit number are referred to as absolute (e.g., address 30232, where 3 is the data type for a input register and 0232 or 232 is the address). Software products at the operator or user level use absolute addresses most frequently. The addresses that do not contain the type and are referenced to zero are referred to as relative (e.g., absolute address 30232 would be relative address 231, remove the data type 3, holding register, and subtract 1 for referencing to zero). All data addresses in MODBUS messages (typically, behind the scenes at the programming communication level) are referenced to zero; that is, the first occurrence of a data item is addressed as item number zero.
MODBUS Range Absolute Addresses 00001-09999 10001-19999 30001-39999 40001-49999 MODBUS Range Relative Addresses 0000-9998 0000-9998 0000-9998 0000-9998 CMC Range Absolute Addresses 00001-09000 10001-19000 30001-39000 40001-49000 CMC Range Relative Addresses 0000-8999 0000-8999 0000-8999 1X36003 0000-8999

Reference

Data Type

0x 1x 3x 4x

Coils Discrete Inputs Input Registers Holding Registers

Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

87

Absolute address for Coil 00127 decimal is relatively addressed as coil 007E hex (126 decimal) Input register with absolute address of 30001 is relatively addressed as register 0000 in the data address field of the message. The function code field that specifies reading or writing data already specifies an input register operation; therefore, the 3x reference is implicit. Holding register with an absolute address of 40108 is relatively addressed as register 006B hex (107 decimal)

Single Module Addresses The addresses provided in this document are for compressors with a single Base Control Module. Multiple Module Addresses For those systems that require multiple Base Control Modules, the addresses for the first module will be as provided within this document. The addresses for the second module will be provided as an engineering submittal.

Data
For both queries and responses, the data is in sixteen bit (two bytes, one word) chunks. For each two byte word, the left most byte is the most significant. For each byte, the left most bit is the most significant. This portion of the message changes with each function code. See the detail that follows for each function for the specifics of this message component.

Byte Count
The number of bytes contained in the data portion of the message. This is used on both queries (reads) and responses.

Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC)


This portion of the message is used to prevent incorrect data from being used in the Master or Slave because of communication errors.

Function Details Function 01 - Read Coil Status


This function reads the state of one or more coils (MODBUS 0x references) in the slave (CMC Base Control Module). For the CMC, these coils represent the Discrete (Digital) Outputs, compressor operating state (see the Operator User Interface Status Bar for definition), any compressor Trip condition and any compressor Alarm condition. If the function returns a 1, the discrete output is on. If the function returns a 0, the discrete output is off. Broadcast is not supported. Refer to the table on the next page for MODBUS Absolute Addresses for each coil supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

88

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Absolut e Address (decimal ) 00187 00188 00189 00190 00191 00192 00193 00194 00195 00196 00197 00198 00199 00200 00201 Relative Address (hex) Absolut e Address (decimal ) 00203 00204 00205 00206 00207 00208 00209 00210 00211 00212 00213 00214 00215 00216 00217 Relative Addres s (hex) 00-CA 00-CB 00-CC 00-CD 00-CE 00-CF 00-D0 00-D1 00-D2 00-D3 00-D4 00-D5 00-D6 00-D7 00-D8

Coil Name - Read Only*

Coil Name - Read Only*

Compressor State - Waiting Compressor State - Coasting Compressor State - Starting Compressor State - Not Ready Compressor State - Ready Compressor State - Surge Unload Compressor State - Autodual Unload Compressor State - Unloading Compressor State - Unloaded Compressor State - Min load Compressor State - Max load Compressor State - Loading Compressor State - Loaded Compressor State - Full Load Compressor State - Analog Input Failed 00202 00-C9 Digital Output, Channel 16 (J12-P1,2) 00218 00-D9 Any Compressor Trip 00219 00-DA Any Compressor Alarm NOTE: (J15-P7,8) is interpreted as Connector J15, Pins 7 and 8 on the Base Control Module. * IMPORTANT: These coils are defined as read only. If you decide to write to these coils, unexpected results could occur.

00-BA 00-BB 00-BC 00-BD 00-BE 00-BF 00-C0 00-C1 00-C2 00-C3 00-C4 00-C5 00-C6 00-C7 00-C8

Digital Output, Channel 1 (J15-P7,8) Digital Output, Channel 2 (J15-P5,6) Digital Output, Channel 3 (J15-P3,4) Digital Output, Channel 4 (J15-P1,2) Digital Output, Channel 5 (J14-P7,8) Digital Output, Channel 6 (J14-P5,6) Digital Output, Channel 7 (J14-P3,4) Digital Output, Channel 8 (J14-P1,2) Digital Output, Channel 9 (J13-P7,8) Digital Output, Channel 10 (J13-P5,6) Digital Output, Channel 11 (J13-P3,4) Digital Output, Channel 12 (J13-P1,2) Digital Output, Channel 13 (J12-P7,8) Digital Output, Channel 14 (J12-P5,6) Digital Output, Channel 15 (J12-P3,4)

Example: Reading a Single Coil After reviewing the Electrical Schematic for your compressor, you determine that the digital output for the prelube pump is located on J12-P7,8 (Channel 13). From the table above, the Absolute Address is decimal 00199 (Relative Address is hexadecimal 00C6) for the output in question. Therefore, to read the state of the prelube pump output the following command is issued (the following data are presented in hexadecimal format):
Device Address 01 Function Code 01 Address Hi Lo 00 C6 Number of Coils Hi Lo 00 01 CRC Lo 1D Hi F7

The response from this command is:


Device Address 01 Function Code 01 Byte Count 01 CRC Data 01 Lo 90 Hi 48

The data (01) means that the discrete output is on, or the prelube pump is running.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Example: Reading Multiple Coils To read all sixteen digital (discrete) outputs, the following command is sent:
Device Address 01 Function Code 01 Address Hi Lo 00 BA Number of Coils Hi Lo 00 10 CRC Lo 1C Hi 23

89

where relative address 00-BA is for digital (discrete) output for Channel 1. The response from this command is:
Device Address 01 Function Code 01 Byte Count 02 CRC Data 04-10 Lo BA Hi F0

To determine the state of each output, review the Electrical Schematic for your compressor. For this example, you determine that the digital output for the prelube pump is located on J12-P7,8 (Channel 13) and the digital output for the remote trouble contact is J15-P3,4 (Channel 3). The first hexadecimal data byte 04 (0000 0100 binary), represents the states of the first eight digital (discrete) outputs (8-1). Therefore, for this example 04 means that Channels 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 2 and 1 are off and Channel 3 (compressor is in an alarm or trip condition) is on. For the next eight channels (16-9) the hexadecimal data byte 10 (0001 0000 binary) means that Channels 16, 15, 14, 12, 11, 10 and 9 are off and Channel 13 (prelube pump is running) is on. The following table graphically depicts this example:
Response Byte 1 Address 8 0 C1 7 0 C0 6 0 BF 5 0 BE 4 0 BD 3 1 BC 2 0 BB 1 0 BA

Response Byte 2 Address

16 0 C9

15 0 C8

14 0 C7

13 1 C6

12 0 C5

11 0 C4

10 0 C3

9 0 C2

A bit response of 1 means that the output is on and a response of 0 means that the output is off.

Function 02 - Read Input Status


This function reads the state of one or more discrete inputs (MODBUS 1x references) in the slave (CMC Base Control Module). For the CMC, these inputs represent the Discrete (Digital) Inputs. If the function returns a 1, the input is on. If the function returns a 0, the input is off. Broadcast is not supported. Refer to the table on the next page for MODBUS Absolute Addresses for each discrete input supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

90

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Absolute Relative Address Input Name - Read Only* Address (hex) (decimal) 10171 00-AA Digital Input, Channel 1 (J4-P2) 10172 00-AB Digital Input, Channel 2 (J4-P3) 10173 00-AC Digital Input, Channel 3 (J4-P4) 10174 00-AD Digital Input, Channel 4 (J4-P5) 10175 00-AE Digital Input, Channel 5 (J4-P6) 10176 00-AF Digital Input, Channel 6 (J4-P7) 10177 00-B0 Digital Input, Channel 7 (J4-P8) 10178 00-B1 Digital Input, Channel 8 (J4-P9) 10179 00-B2 Digital Input, Channel 9 (J5-P2) 10180 00-B3 Digital Input, Channel 10 (J5-P3) 10181 00-B4 Digital Input, Channel 11 (J5-P4) 10182 00-B5 Digital Input, Channel 12 (J5-P5) 10183 00-B6 Digital Input, Channel 13 (J5-P6) 10184 00-B7 Digital Input, Channel 14 (J5-P7) 10185 00-B8 Digital Input, Channel 15 (J5-P8) 10186 00-B9 Digital Input, Channel 16 (J5-P9) NOTE: (J4-P2) is interpreted as Connector J4, Pin 2 on the Base Control Module. * IMPORTANT: These Digital Inputs are defined as read only. If you decide to write to these Inputs, unexpected results could occur.

Example: Read Single Discrete Input After reviewing the Electrical Schematic for your compressor, you determine that the digital input for emergency stop push button is located on J4-P5 (Channel 4). From the table above, the Absolute Address is decimal 10174 (Relative Address is hexadecimal 00AD) for the input in question. Therefore, to read the state of the emergency stop push button the following command is issued (the following data are presented in hexadecimal format):
Device Address 01 Function Code 02 Address Hi Lo 00 AD Number of Digital Inputs Hi Lo 00 01 CRC Lo 28 Hi 2B

The response from this command is:


Device Address 01 Function Code 02 Byte Count 01 CRC Data 01 Lo 60 Hi 48

The data (01) means that the input is on, or the emergency stop push button is pressed. Example: Read Multiple Discrete Inputs The method for reading multiple Discrete Inputs is the same as reading multiple coils. See the example for Reading Multiple Coils.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Function 03 - Read Holding Registers

91

Reads the binary content of holding registers (MODBUS 4x references) in the slave (CMC Base Control Module). For the CMC, these holding registers contain the Analog Output values and Analog Alarm and Trip Setpoint values for all CMC inputs and outputs. Broadcast is not supported. The CMC is primarily a 32-bit floating-point microprocessor controller. And, since MODBUS is designed to be a 16-bit system, the CMC supports two methods for determining the value for each holding register (This also applies to Input Registers.) NOTE Since MODBUS is a 16-bit system, the programmer must get two 16-bit numbers and combine them into one 32-bit floating-point number.

The first method uses two 16-bit integers to represent the integer and fraction part of the value. The second method uses one 32-bit IEEE floating point number. (NOTE: For those who would like to only get the 16-bit integer value, this will work well for most inputs; however, the CMC has some inputs, like vibration, that are typically less than one. Since the CMC has programmable analog and discrete inputs and outputs, the programmer must use the electrical schematic supplied with the contract to determine which function name and units of measure are associated with each input and output. Refer to the table below for MODBUS Absolute Addresses for each Holding Register supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

92

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Holding Register Name - Read/Write Analog Output, Channel 1 (J3-P1,3) Analog Output, Channel 2 (J3-P4,6) Analog Output, Channel 3 (J3-P7,9) Analog Output, Channel 4 (J3-P10,12) Analog Input, Channel 1 (J2-P1,3) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 1 (J2-P1,3) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 1 (J2-P1,3) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 1 (J2-P1,3) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 2 (J2-P5,7) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 2 (J2-P5,7) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 2 (J2-P5,7) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 2 (J2-P5,7) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 3 (J1-P1) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 3 (J1-P1) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 3 (J1-P1) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 3 (J1-P1) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 4 (J1-P4) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 4 (J1-P4) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 4 (J1-P4) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 4 (J1-P4) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 5 (J1-P5) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 5 (J1-P5) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 5 (J1-P5) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 5 (J1-P5) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 6 (J1-P8) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 6 (J1-P8) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 6 (J1-P8) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 6 (J1-P8) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 7 (J1-P9) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 7 (J1-P9) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 7 (J1-P9) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 7 (J1-P9) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 8 (J1-P12) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 8 (J1-P12) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 8 (J1-P12) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 8 (J1-P12) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 9 (J1-P13) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 9 (J1-P13) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 9 (J1-P13) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 9 (J1-P13) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 10 (J1-P16) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 10 (J1-P16) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 10 (J1-P16) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 10 (J1-P16) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 11 (J1-P17) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 11 (J1-P17) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 11 (J1-P17) - Low Alarm Setpoint

Signed 16 Bit Exponent Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 40053 00-34 40055 00-36 40057 00-38 40059 00-3A 40061 00-3C 40063 00-3E 40065 00-40 40067 00-42 40069 00-44 40071 00-46 40073 00-48 40075 00-4A 40077 00-4C 40079 00-4E 40081 00-50 40083 00-52 40085 00-54 40087 00-56 40089 00-58 40091 00-5A 40093 00-5C 40095 00-5E 40097 00-60 40099 00-62 40101 00-64 40103 00-66 40105 00-68 40107 00-6A 40109 00-6C 40111 00-6E 40113 00-70 40115 00-72 40117 00-74 40119 00-76 40121 00-78 40123 00-7A 40125 00-7C 40127 00-7E 40129 00-80 40131 00-82 40133 00-84 40135 00-86 40137 00-88 40139 00-8A 40141 00-8C 40143 00-8E 40145 00-90

Unsigned 16 Bit Fraction Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 40054 00-35 40056 00-37 40058 00-39 40060 00-3B 40062 00-3D 40064 00-3F 40066 00-41 40068 00-43 40070 00-45 40072 00-47 40074 00-49 40076 00-4B 40078 00-4D 40080 00-4F 40082 00-51 40084 00-53 40086 00-55 40088 00-57 40090 00-59 40092 00-5B 40094 00-5D 40096 00-5F 40098 00-61 40100 00-63 40102 00-65 40104 00-67 40106 00-69 40108 00-6B 40110 00-6D 40112 00-6F 40114 00-71 40116 00-73 40118 00-75 40120 00-77 40122 00-79 40124 00-7B 40126 00-7D 40128 00-7F 40130 00-81 40132 00-83 40134 00-85 40136 00-87 40138 00-89 40140 00-8B 40142 00-8D 40144 00-8F 40146 00-91

Signed IEEE 32-Bit Float Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 43053 0B-EC 43055 0B-EE 43057 0B-F0 43059 0B-F2 43061 0B-F4 43063 0B-F6 43065 0B-F8 43067 0B-FA 43069 0B-FC 43071 0B-FE 43073 0C-00 43075 0C-02 43077 0C-04 43079 0C-06 43081 0C-08 43083 0C-0A 43085 0C-0C 43087 0C-0E 43089 0C-10 43091 0C-12 43093 0C-14 43095 0C-16 43097 0C-18 43099 0C-1A 43101 0C-1C 43103 0C-1E 43105 0C-20 43107 0C-22 43109 0C-24 43111 0C-26 43113 0C-28 43115 0C-2A 43117 0C-2C 43119 0C-2E 43121 0C-30 43123 0C-32 43125 0C-34 43127 0C-36 43129 0C-38 43131 0C-3A 43133 0C-3C 43135 0C-3E 43137 0C-40 43139 0C-42 43141 0C-44 43143 0C-46 43145 0C-48

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Analog Input, Channel 11 (J1-P17) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 12 (J1-P20) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 12 (J1-P20) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 12 (J1-P20) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 12 (J1-P20) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 13 (J1-P21) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 13 (J1-P21) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 13 (J1-P21) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 13 (J1-P21) - Low Trip Setpoint 40147 40149 40151 40153 40155 40157 40159 40161 40163 00-92 00-94 00-96 00-98 00-9A 00-9C 00-9E 00-A0 00-A2 40148 40150 40152 40154 40156 40158 40160 40162 40164 00-93 00-95 00-97 00-99 00-9B 00-9D 00-9F 00-A1 00-A3 43147 43149 43151 43153 43155 43157 43159 43161 43163 0C-4A 0C-4C 0C-4E 0C-50 0C-52 0C-54 0C-56 0C-58 0C-5A

93

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

94

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Holding Register Name - Read/Write Analog Input, Channel 14 (J1-P24) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 14 (J1-P24) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 14 (J1-P24) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 14 (J1-P24) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 15 (J1-P25) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 15 (J1-P25) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 15 (J1-P25) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 15 (J1-P25) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 16 (J1-P28) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 16 (J1-P28) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 16 (J1-P28) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 16 (J1-P28) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 17 (J1-P29) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 17 (J1-P29) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 17 (J1-P29) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 17 (J1-P29) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 18 (J1-P32) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 18 (J1-P32) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 18 (J1-P32) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 18 (J1-P32) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 19 (J1-P33) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 19 (J1-P33) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 19 (J1-P33) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 19 (J1-P33) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 20 (J1-P36) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 20 (J1-P36) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 20 (J1-P36) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 20 (J1-P36) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 21 (J1-P37) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 21 (J1-P37) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 21 (J1-P37) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 21 (J1-P37) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 22 (J1-P40) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 22 (J1-P40) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 22 (J1-P40) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 22 (J1-P40) - Low Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 23 (J1-P41) - High Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 23 (J1-P41) - High Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 23 (J1-P41) - Low Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Channel 23 (J1-P41) - Low Trip Setpoint Motor Current User Pressure Setpoint MinLoad (Throttle Limit, TL) MaxLoad (High Load Limit, HLL) Autodual Reload Percent Autodual Unload Point Autodual Unload Timer Pressure Setpoint Ramp Rate

Signed 16 Bit Exponent Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 40165 00-A4 40167 00-A6 40169 00-A8 40171 00-AA 40173 00-AC 40175 00-AE 40177 00-B0 40179 00-B2 40181 00-B4 40183 00-B6 40185 00-B8 40187 00-BA 40189 00-BC 40191 00-BE 40193 00-C0 40195 00-C2 40197 00-C4 40199 00-C6 40201 00-C8 40203 00-CA 40205 00-CC 40207 00-CE 40209 00-D0 40211 00-D2 40213 00-D4 40215 00-D6 40217 00-D8 40219 00-DA 40221 00-DC 40223 00-DE 40225 00-E0 40227 00-E2 40229 00-E4 40231 00-E6 40233 00-E8 40235 00-EA 40237 00-EC 40239 00-EE 40241 00-F0 40243 00-F2 40267 01-0A 40269 01-0C 40271 01-0E 40273 01-10 40275 01-12 40277 01-14 40279 01-16 40281 01-18

Unsigned 16 Bit Fraction Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 40166 00-A5 40168 00-A7 40170 00-A9 40172 00-AB 40174 00-AD 40176 00-AF 40178 00-B1 40180 00-B3 40182 00-B5 40184 00-B7 40186 00-B9 40188 00-BB 40190 00-BD 40192 00-BF 40194 00-C1 40196 00-C3 40198 00-C5 40200 00-C7 40202 00-C9 40204 00-CB 40206 00-CD 40208 00-CF 40210 00-D1 40212 00-D3 40214 00-D5 40216 00-D7 40218 00-D9 40220 00-DB 40222 00-DD 40224 00-DF 40226 00-E1 40228 00-E3 40230 00-E5 40232 00-E7 40234 00-E9 40236 00-EB 40238 00-ED 40240 00-EF 40242 00-F1 40244 00-F3 40268 01-0B 40270 01-0D 40272 01-0F 40274 01-11 40276 01-13 40278 01-15 40280 01-17 40282 01-19

Signed IEEE 32-Bit Float Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 43165 0C-5C 43167 0C-5E 43169 0C-60 43171 0C-62 43173 0C-64 43175 0C-66 43177 0C-68 43179 0C-6A 43181 0C-6C 43183 0C-6E 43185 0C-70 43187 0C-72 43189 0C-74 43191 0C-76 43193 0C-78 43195 0C-7A 43197 0C-7C 43199 0C-7E 43201 0C-80 43203 0C-82 43205 0C-84 43207 0C-86 43209 0C-88 43211 0C-8A 43213 0C-8C 43215 0C-8E 43217 0C-90 43219 0C-92 43221 0C-94 43223 0C-96 43225 0C-98 43227 0C-9A 43229 0C-9C 43231 0C-9E 43233 0C-A0 43235 0C-A2 43237 0C-A4 43239 0C-A6 43241 0C-A8 43243 0C-AA 43267 0C-C2 43269 0C-C4 43271 0C-C6 43273 0C-C8 43275 0C-CA 43277 0C-CC 43279 0C-CE 43281 0C-D0

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Inlet Valve Unload Position Start Timer CT Ratio Power On Hours Running Hours Loaded Hours Number of Starts 40283 40285 40287 40297 40299 40301 40303 01-1A 01-1C 01-1E 01-28 01-2A 01-2C 01-2E 40284 40286 40288 40298 40300 40302 40304 01-1B 01-1D 01-1F 01-29 01-2B 01-2D 01-2F 43283 43285 43287 43297 43299 43301 43303 0C-D2 0C-D4 0C-D6 0C-E0 0C-E2 0C-E4 0C-E6

95

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

96

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Signed 16 Bit Exponent Absolute Relative Holding Register Name - Read/Write Address Address (Decimal) (hex) Inlet Valve, MaxLoad, Proportional Constant 40313 01-38 Inlet Valve, MaxLoad, Integral Constant 40315 01-3A Inlet Valve, MaxLoad, Derivative Constant 40317 01-3C Inlet Valve, MinLoad, Proportional Constant 40319 01-3E Inlet Valve, MinLoad, Integral Constant 40321 01-40 Inlet Valve, MinLoad, Derivative Constant 40323 01-42 Inlet Valve, Pressure, Proportional Constant 40325 01-44 Inlet Valve, Pressure, Integral Constant 40327 01-46 Inlet Valve, Pressure, Derivative Constant 40329 01-48 Bypass Valve, Pressure, Proportional Constant 40331 01-4A Bypass Valve, Pressure, Integral Constant 40333 01-4C Bypass Valve, Pressure, Derivative Constant 40335 01-4E Compressor Control Mode; 1=Modulate, 2=Autodual 40339 01-52 NOTE: (J1-P1) is interpreted as Connector J1, Pin 1 on the Base Control Module.

Unsigned 16 Bit Fraction Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 40314 01-39 40316 01-3B 40318 01-3D 40320 01-3F 40322 01-41 40324 01-43 40326 01-45 40328 01-47 40330 01-49 40332 01-4B 40334 01-4D 40336 01-4F 40340 01-53

Signed IEEE 32-Bit Float Absolute Relative Address Address (Decimal) (hex) 43313 0C-F0 43315 0C-F2 43317 0C-F4 43319 0C-F6 43321 0C-F8 43323 0C-FA 43325 0C-FC 43327 0C-FE 43329 0D-00 43331 0D-02 43333 0D-04 43335 0D-06 43339 0D-0A

Example: See example for Function 04.

Function 04 - Read Input Registers


Reads the binary content of input registers (MODBUS 3x references) in the slave (CMC Base Control Module). For the CMC, these input registers refer to the Analog Input values. Broadcast is not supported. The CMC is primarily a 32-bit floating-point microprocessor controller. And, since MODBUS is designed to be a 16-bit system, the CMC supports two methods for determining the value for each holding register. (This also applies to Input Registers.) The first method uses two 16-bit integers to represent the integer and fraction part of the value. The second method uses one 32-bit IEEE floating point number. NOTE Since MODBUS is a 16-bit system, the programmer must get two 16-bit numbers and combine them into one 32-bit floating-point number.

For those who would like to only get the 16-bit integer value, this will work well for most inputs; however, the CMC has some inputs, like vibration, that are typically less than one.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Signed Unsigned Signed 16-Bit Integer 16-Bit Fraction IEEE 32-Bit Float Absolute Relative Absolute Relative Absolute Relative Input Register Name - Read Only* Address Address Address Address Address Address (Decimal) (hex) (Decimal) (hex) (Decimal) (hex) Analog Input, Channel 1 (J2-P1,3) 30003 00-02 30004 00-03 33003 0B-BA Analog Input, Channel 2 (J2-P5,7) 30005 00-04 30006 00-05 33005 0B-BC Analog Input, Channel 3 (J1-P1) 30007 00-06 30008 00-07 33007 0B-BE Analog Input, Channel 4 (J1-P4) 30009 00-08 30010 00-09 33009 0B-C0 Analog Input, Channel 5 (J1-P5) 30011 00-0A 30012 00-0B 33011 0B-C2 Analog Input, Channel 6 (J1-P8) 30013 00-0C 30014 00-0D 33013 0B-C4 Analog Input, Channel 7 (J1-P9) 30015 00-0E 30016 00-0F 33015 0B-C6 Analog Input, Channel 8 (J1-P12) 30017 00-10 30018 00-11 33017 0B-C8 Analog Input, Channel 9 (J1-P13) 30019 00-12 30020 00-13 33019 0B-CA Analog Input, Channel 10 (J1-P16) 30021 00-14 30022 00-15 33021 0B-CC Analog Input, Channel 11 (J1-P17) 30023 00-16 30024 00-17 33023 0B-CE Analog Input, Channel 12 (J1-P20) 30025 00-18 30026 00-19 33025 0B-D0 Analog Input, Channel 13 (J1-P21) 30027 00-1A 30028 00-1B 33027 0B-D2 Analog Input, Channel 14 (J1-P24) 30029 00-1C 30030 00-1D 33029 0B-D4 Analog Input, Channel 15 (J1-P25) 30031 00-1E 30032 00-1F 33031 0B-D6 Analog Input, Channel 16 (J1-P28) 30033 00-20 30034 00-21 33033 0B-D8 Analog Input, Channel 17 (J1-P29) 30035 00-22 30036 00-23 33035 0B-DA Analog Input, Channel 18 (J1-P32) 30037 00-24 30038 00-25 33037 0B-DC Analog Input, Channel 19 (J1-P33) 30039 00-26 30040 00-27 33039 0B-DE Analog Input, Channel 20 (J1-P36) 30041 00-28 30042 00-29 33041 0B-E0 Analog Input, Channel 21 (J1-P37) 30043 00-2A 30044 00-2B 33043 0B-E2 Analog Input, Channel 22 (J1-P40) 30045 00-2C 30046 00-2D 33045 0B-E4 Analog Input, Channel 23 (J1-P41) 30047 00-2E 30048 00-2F 33047 0B-E6 CT Input (J9-P1,2) 30049 00-30 30050 00-31 33049 0B-E8 NOTE: (J1-P1) is interpreted as Connector J1, Pin 1 on the Base Control Module. * IMPORTANT: These Input Registers are defined as read only. If you decide to write to these Input Registers, unexpected results could occur.

97

Example: Read Single Channel 16-Bit Integer and Fraction After reviewing the Electrical Schematic for your compressor, you determine that the analog input for System Pressure is located on J1-P1 (Channel 3). From the table above, the Absolute Address is decimal 30007 (Relative Address is hexadecimal 0006) for the input in question. Therefore, to read the 16 Bit Integer and 16 Bit Fraction for System Pressure the following command is issued (the following data are presented in hexadecimal format):
Device Address 01 Function Code 04 Address Hi Lo 00 06 Number of Registers Hi Lo 00 02 CRC Lo 91 Hi CA

The response from this command is:


Data Device Address 01 Function Code 04 Byte Count 04 Reg-1 Hi Lo 00 64 Reg-2 Hi Lo 13 4E CRC Lo 37 Hi 5F

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

98

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Register 1 is the Integer portion of the System Pressure or (0064h, 100 decimal). Register 2 is the Fraction portion of the System Pressure or (134Eh, 4942 decimal). Each fraction has a range between 0 and 9999. So the System Pressure, expressed as a floating point number is 100.4942 psi.

Example: Read Single Channel IEEE 32-Bit Floating Point Number To continue with the example, when you decide to get the System Pressure as an IEEE 32 Bit floating point number you must issue the following command:
Device Address 01 Function Code 04 Address Hi Lo 0B BE Number of Registers Hi Lo 00 02 CRC Lo 13 Hi CB

The response from this command is:


Data Device Address 01 Function Code 04 Byte Count 04 Reg-1 Hi Lo 42 DC Reg-2 Hi Lo D4 C6 CRC Lo F1 Hi 54

So the System Pressure, expressed as a floating point number is 110.4155731201 psi. IEEE floating point numbers are represented in 32 bits as shown below.
31 30 29 28 27 26 exponent sign 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
6

mantissa

Convert hexadecimal registers 1 and 2 (Reg-1, Reg-2) into decimal values ...
Register 1 1 2 2 Byte Hi Lo Hi Lo Symbol R1HB R1LB R2HB R2LB Hex 42 DC D4 C6 Decimal 66 220 212 198

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Determine the sign (positive = 0 or negative = 1) ... Sign = (R1HB And 128) / 128, where And is defined as a bit-wise And Sign = (66 And 128) / 128 = 0 Determine the exponent ... Exponent = ((R1HB And 127) 2) + INT(R1LB / 128), where INT is defined as INTEGER Exponent = ((66 And 127) 2) + INT(220/128) = 133 Determine the mantissa... Mantissa = ((((R1LB And 127) 256) + R2HB) 256) + R2LB Mantissa = ((((220 And 127) 256) + 212) 256) + 198 = 6083782 Putting the 32 bit IEEE value together... Value = (-1sign) (2(exponent - 127)) ((Mantissa 2-23) + 1) Value = (-10) (2(133- 127)) ((6083782 2-23) + 1) = 110.4155731201 NOTE When Sign = Exponent = Mantissa = 0, Value = 0. This is a special case for the above equation.

99

Example: Read Multiple Channels The procedure for reading multiple channels is the same as reading a single channel with the exception of requesting more data. NOTE: You must read a contiguous group of registers (channels) for a single command.

Function 05 - Force Single Coil


Forces a single coil (MODBUS 0x references) to either ON or OFF. When broadcast, the function forces the same coil reference in all attached slaves. Refer to the table below for MODBUS Absolute Addresses for each coil supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface. NOTE This function will override the CMCs current state. The forced state will remain valid until the CMC next solves the coil. The coil will remain forced if it is not programmed in the CMC logic.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

100

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

CAUTION

For all of the following Remote Coils, the compressors REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch must be in the ENABLED position for these commands to execute. When DISABLED, the CMC ignores (there is no exception response) these coils being forced ON or OFF.

Absolute Address (decimal) 00221 00222 00223 00224 00225 00226

Relative Address (hex) 00-DC 00-DD 00-DE 00-DF 00-E0 00-E1

Coil Name - Write Only Remote Horn Silence (Acknowledge) Remote Reset Remote Load Remote Unload Remote Start Remote Stop

Example: Forcing a Coil For all MODBUS devices, a value of FF 00 hex requests the coil to be ON. A value of 00 00 requests it to be OFF. All other values are illegal and will not affect the coil. NOTE: For the CMC, forcing the above listed coils OFF is not meaningful because the default state of each of the above coils is OFF. When using these commands, they should be sent once (momentary) and the CMC will execute the commands. To remotely reset the compressor, the following command is issued:
Device Address 01 Function Code 05 Address Hi Lo 00 DD Forced Data Hi FF Lo 00 Lo 1C CRC Hi 00

The response from this command is identical to the command sent:


Device Address 01 Function Code 05 Address Hi Lo 00 DD Number of Registers Hi Lo FF 00 CRC Lo 1C Hi 00

Function 06 - Preset Single Register


Presets a value into a single holding register (MODBUS 4x reference). When broadcast, the function presets the same register reference in all attached slaves. Refer to the table for the Holding Register list for the MODBUS Absolute Addresses supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

101

NOTE This function will override the CMCs current state. The preset value will remain valid in the register until the CMC logic next solves the register contents. The register's value will remain if it is not programmed in the controller's logic.

CAUTION

This function can only set a single 16-bit holding register. Since the CMC operates with 32-bit values, you must use Function 16 (10 Hex) - Preset Multiple Registers for setting the 32-bit IEEE register values. Also, you may not set the 16-bit fraction without its 16-bit integer. Therefore, you must use the Preset Multiple Registers function to send this 32-bit pair. See the examples that follow for Function 16.

CAUTION

The position of the REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is NOT considered when forcing coils or writing registers to the CMC. Reads and Writes are always enabled. Repeatedly writing a value to a register or forcing a coil without regard to the position of the switch can effectively disable a local write. Please use caution when writing registers or forcing coils.

Example: Presetting a Single Register (16-bit) Integer To change the integer value for the User Pressure Setpoint (absolute address 40269, relative address 01-0C) to 100 (00-64 hex) psi, send the following command...
Device Address 01 Function Code 06 Address Hi Lo 01 0C Register Value Hi Lo 00 64 CRC Lo 49 Hi DE

The response from this command is identical to the command sent:


Device Address 01 Function Code 06 Address Hi Lo 01 0C Register Value Hi Lo 00 64 CRC Lo 49 Hi DE

Function 15 (0F Hex) - Force Multiple Coils


Forces each coil (MODBUS 0x reference) in a series of contiguous coils to either ON or OFF. When broadcast, the function forces the same coil references in all attached slaves 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

102

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


(CMC Base Control Modules). Refer to the table for the Coil list for the MODBUS Absolute Addresses supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface.

NOTE This function will override the CMCs current state. The forced state will remain valid until the CMC next solves the coil. The coil will remain forced if it is not programmed in the controller's logic.

CAUTION

The position of the REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is NOT considered when forcing coils or writing registers to the CMC. Reads and Writes are always enabled. Repeatedly writing a value to a register or forcing a coil without regard to the position of the switch can effectively disable a local write. Please use caution when writing registers or forcing coils.

Example: Forcing Multiple Coils To force a reset (absolute address 00222, relative address DD) and start (absolute address 00225, relative address E0) of the compressor the following command is sent...
Device Address 01 Functio n Code 0F Address Hi 00 Lo DD Number of Coils Hi 00 Lo 04 Numbe r of Data Bytes 01 Coil Data Lo 09 Lo 12 CRC Hi 83

The number of contiguous coils is four (00225, 00224, 00223 and 00222). The number of data bytes is one because we can set up to eight coils in a single byte. The coil data is nine because we want to set the first bit and fourth bit in the byte (0000-1001, the bytes are numbered right to left). All bits not used are padded with zero. The response from this command is similar to the command sent except that the number of data bytes and the coil data themselves are not echoed:
Device Address 01 Functio n Code 0F Address Hi 00 Lo DD Number of Coils Hi 00 Lo 04 CRC Lo C4 Hi 32

Function 16 (10 Hex) - Preset Multiple Registers


Presets values into a sequence of contiguous holding registers (MODBUS 4x references). When broadcast, the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


(CMC Base Control Modules). Refer to the table for the Input Register list for the MODBUS Absolute Addresses supported by the CMC-MODBUS Interface. NOTE This function will override the CMCs current state. The forced state will remain valid until the CMC next solves the register. The register will remain forced if it is not programmed in the controller's logic.

103

CAUTION

The position of the REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is NOT considered when forcing coils or writing registers to the CMC. Reads and Writes are always enabled. Repeatedly writing a value to a register or forcing a coil without regard to the position of the switch can effectively disable a local write. Please use caution when writing registers or forcing coils.

Example: Presetting Holding Registers for 32-bit Values The difficulty in setting 32-bit values is determining the four data bytes for the number you want to send. The process required is... 1. 2. Determine the sign (positive = 0 or negative = 1). This is the first bit. Divide the decimal value by 2 until the result is less than 2, but greater than 1. Count the number of iterations required. Add 127 to the number of iterations. This result is the exponent. Convert this result to binary. These are the next eight bits. From the result obtained from step 2, subtract 1. Then, multiply this result by 2. If the result is less than 1, then the value of the first mantissa bit is 0. Otherwise, the mantissa bit is 1. If the result is greater than or equal to 1, then subtract 1 from the result and proceed with step 3 until the result is 0 or you have gone through this process 23 times. Combine all 32 bits from the steps above and convert this value to hexadecimal. These 32 bits are the 4 hexadecimal data bytes needed for the command.
Iteratio n 1 2 3 4 5 6 Decimal 105.40000 52.70000 26.35000 13.17500 6.58750 3.29375 / / / / / / 2 2 2 2 2 2 = = = = = = Result 52.700000 26.350000 13.175000 6.587500 3.293750 1.646875

3.

4.

As an example, we will start with the decimal value of 105.4. 1. Since this is a positive number, the first bit is 0. 2. Determine the exponent bits by ...

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

104

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

It took us six iterations to get the result to a number that is less than two and greater than or equal to one. Now, we must add 127 for an exponent of Iteration Decimal Operati Result Bit 133. Converting this to binary, the next eight bits are on represented as 10000101. 3. Determine the mantissa bits by From the table at right, 0100101100110011001100 represent the next 23 bits. 4. Combining the bits in sign, exponent and then mantissa order ... 0100-0010-1101-0010-1100-1100-1100-1100 This converts to 42-D2-CC-CC in hexadecimal. To change the holding registers for user pressure setpoint (for 32 bit IEEE floating point numbers the absolute address is 43269, relative address 0C-C4) to 105.4, issue the following command...
1 1.646875 2 1.29375 3 0.5875 4 1.175 5 0.35 6 0.7 7 1.4 8 0.8 9 1.6 10 1.2 11 0.4 12 0.8 13 1.6 14 1.2 15 0.4 16 0.8 17 1.6 18 1.2 19 0.4 20 0.8 21Data Bytes 1.6 for Register 1.2 22 #2 23 0.4 Hi Lo CC CC - 1 * 2 = 1.29375 - 1 * 2 = 0.5875 *2= 1.175 -1*2= 0.35 *2= 0.7 *2= 1.4 -1*2= 0.8 *2= 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 *2= 0.8 *2= 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 *2= 0.8 *2= 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 *2= 0.8 *2= 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 - 1 *CRC 2= 0.4 *2= 0.8 Lo Hi 4A 18 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

Device Address 01

Functio n Code 10

Address Hi 0C Lo C4

Number of Registers Hi 00 Lo 02

Numbe r of Data Bytes 04

Data Bytes for Register #1 Hi Lo 42 D2

The response from this command is similar to the command sent except that the number of data bytes and the data bytes themselves are not echoed:
Device Address 01 Function Code 10 Address Hi Lo 0C C4 Number of Registers Hi Lo 00 02 CRC Lo 03 Hi 65

NOTE Sending 32 bit values are typically not necessary. Sending the data as a 16 bit integer only or a 16 bit integer and 16 bit fraction will satisfy most requirements. Some systems have 32 bit capability built directly into their products. We have provided this feature for those systems.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

105

CAUTION

The position of the REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is NOT considered when forcing coils or writing registers to the CMC. Reads and Writes are always enabled. Repeatedly writing a value to a register or forcing a coil without regard to the position of the switch can effectively disable a local write. Please use caution when writing registers or forcing coils.

Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Holding Register Change the integer and fraction value for the user pressure setpoint (absolute address 40269, relative address 01-0C) to 110.5 psi. The integer portion of the number 110 (00-6E hex) is placed at address 40269 and the fraction 0.5 is converted to 5000 (13-88 hex) and is placed at address 40270 (or the second data byte). To change the register, issue the following command...
Device Address 01 Functio n Code 10 Address Hi 01 Lo 0C Number of Registers Hi 00 Lo 02 Numbe r of Data Bytes 04 Data Bytes for Register #1 Hi Lo 00 6E Data Bytes for Register #2 Hi Lo 13 88 CRC Lo 92 Hi E1

The response from this command is similar to the command sent except that the number of data bytes and the data bytes themselves are not echoed:
Device Address 01 Function Code 10 Address Hi Lo 01 0C Number of Registers Hi Lo 00 02 CRC Lo 80 Hi 37

Exception Responses
Except for broadcast messages, when a master device sends a query to a slave device it expects a normal response, in all other cases a time out or exception response is returned. The four possible responses to a the master's query are: If the slave device receives the query without a communication error, and can handle the query normally, it returns a normal response. If the slave does not receive the query due to a communication error, no response is returned. The master program will eventually process a time-out condition for the query. If the slave receives the query, but detects a communication error (parity, or CRC), no response is returned. The master program will eventually process a time-out condition for the query. If the slave receives the query without a communication error, but cannot handle it (for example, if the request is to read a nonexistent coil or register), the slave will return an exception response informing the master of the nature of the error.

The exception response message has two fields that differentiate it from a normal response: 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

106 Function Code Field

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

For a normal response, the UCM echoes the function code of the original query in the function code field of the response. All function codes have their most significant bits set to zero; therefore, the values are always below 80 hexadecimal. When an exception response occurs, the UCM sets the most significant bit of the function code to 1. This makes the function code value in an exception response exactly 80 hexadecimal higher than the value would be for a normal response.
7 1 Most Significant Bit 6 5 4 0 0 0 3 0 Least Significant Bit 2 1 0 0 0 0

With the function code's most significant bit set, the application program can recognize an exception response and can examine the data field for the exception code.

Data Field
For a normal response, the UCM will return information in the data field (depending upon the query message sent). For an exception response, the UCM returns an exception code in the data field. This defines the UCMs condition that caused the exception.

Exception Codes Supported by the CMC Microcontroller

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Cod e 01 Name Illegal Function Meaning The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the slave. This exception code happens when: (1) the function code is other than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15 or 16 (2) a message has the incorrect number of bytes for the function specified The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the slave. This exception code happens when: (1) the address is not programmed into the Base Control Module (BCM) (2) the address is outside of the ranges (a) 00001-00512 for coils (b) 10001-10512 for discrete inputs (c) 30001-31024 for integer and fractional analog inputs (d) 33001-34024 for floating point analog inputs (e) 40001-41024 for integer and fractional input registers (f) 43001-44024 for floating point analog input registers A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the slave. This exception code happens when: (1) the number of coils, discrete inputs, registers or analog inputs is equal to zero (2) request for more than the maximum number of parameters (3) the force single coil command, Function 05, is issued and the value is other than FF00 or 0000 (4) the force multiple coil command, Function 15, is issued and the number of bytes does not equal the number of bits to set (5) the preset single register command, Function 6, and preset multiple registers commands, Function 16, is issued and the starting address is not even, the number of registers specified does not correspond to the number of bytes in the message, the integer part of the number is outside the range 32768 to +32767, the fractional part of the number is outside of the range 0-9999, or the value is not a valid 32 bit IEEE floating point number An unrecoverable error occurred while the slave was attempting to perform the requested action. This exception code happens when: (1) no response from the Base Control Module (BCM) since 800 milliseconds from the time the message was sent BCM not wired properly, BCM hardware problem or BCM Module ID not equal to one (2) when there is an unexpected response from the BCM this is the default exception response

107

02

Illegal Data Address

03

Illegal Data Value

04

Slave Device Failure

Maximum Query / Response Parameters


The listing below shows the maximum amount of data that the CMC Microcontroller can return in a single slave response from a valid MODBUS command.
Function Dec Hex 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 15 0F 16 10 Description Read Coil Status Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Force Multiple Coils Preset Multiple Registers Maximum Parameters 512 coils 512 inputs 64 registers 64 registers 1 coil 1 register 512 coils 64 registers

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

108 CMC Data

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

The CMC Microcontroller supports several data types. They are coil, integer, fraction and floating point. Coil - 1 bit, 1 means True or Active, 0 means False or Not Active. Integer - 16 bit signed integer, 32768 to +32767. Fraction - 16 bit unsigned integer, 0 9999, represents the decimal (fractional) part of the number (1 represents 0.0001, 10 represents 0.0010, 100 represents 0.0100 and 1000 represents 0.1000). Floating Point - 32 bit IEEE number (requires reading two registers to get full number).

For example if the System Pressure input is located on Channel 3 (address 30007) and the value of the pressure is 100.5 then: Address 30007 contains 100 Address 30008 contains 5000 Address 33007 contains the high 16 bits of the IEEE value for 100.5 Address 33008 contains the low 16 bits of IEEE value for 100.5 Additionally, the type of data in a location determines the commands that can be used to access the data. For the previous example of System Pressure addresses 00007, 03007, 10007, 13007, 40007 and 43023 return errors because coil, input status and holding register commands cannot read input register data.

Scaling and Units of Measure


The MODBUS data are scaled in English engineering units. All pressures are in psi, temperatures in degrees F, vibrations in mils, and current in amps. For example, when the CMC Operator User Interface displays the system pressure as 7.73 kg/cm2, the value for system pressure obtained through MODBUS communications is 110 psi.

Communication Parameters
Configuration of the communication speed (baud rate), parity, number of data bits and number of stop bits is available through the Ingersoll-Rand Service Tool and will be provided by a certified Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

109

The CMC-DF1 Interface


Introduction
Customers may want to communicate to the CMC control systems for remote compressor control and monitoring through their Allen-Bradley data highway plus (DH+) network. Adding Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol to the UCM module allows our customers to incorporate our compressors into their plant-wide Allen-Bradley PLC control system. This communication capability also provides for flexibility in the customer's compressed air operation through remote start, stop, and data gathering for preventative maintenance. The customer or his representative must write system software to suit his individual needs for remote control and monitoring. Since the customer writes this interface, the system can be as flexible as the customer desires. One avenue for communicating with the CMC is via DF1 protocol over a full duplex RS-422 link. This requires an Allen-Bradley interface module 1770-KF2 to link our intelligent RS422A asynchronous device, Universal Communication Module (UCM), to the Allen-Bradley DH+ network. The CMC Microcontroller can communicate with other devices over a variety of communication standards. Supported standards, or protocols, include RS-232, IRBUS (Ingersoll-Rand Proprietary), Modicons MODBUS, and Allen-Bradley DF1. The built-in ports of the CMCs Universal Communication Module access communications. This UCM-DF1 Interface defines the message structure that a CMC Microcontroller uses to exist on a DH+ network. This interface will allow the DH+ network to gather information and control the compressor. The information presented in these sections that follow do not include the Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol details. Detailed information can be obtained from Allen-Bradley Publication 17706.5.117 - October 1996 - DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual and Data Highway or Data Highway Plus Asynchronous (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) Interface Module (Cat. No. 1770-KF2) Users Manual. A DH+ link implements peer-to-peer communication with a token-passing scheme to rotate mastership among the nodes connected to that link. In order to communicate over AllenBradley DH+ network, an Allen-Bradley 1770-KF2 interface module must be used. The 1770-KF2 always acts as one node on the DH+ network, which translates DH+ messages to DF1 format, and passes these messages on to the UCM on the RS-422A asynchronous end, or vice versa. The following is a picture of 1770-KF2:

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

110 Full-Duplex Protocol

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

The UCM-DF1 interface only supports the point-to-point full-duplex DF1 protocol, which is like a two-lane bridge; traffic can travel in both directions at one time. Full-duplex protocol also provides higher performance applications to get the highest possible throughput.

DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol Message Frames


The following table shows the general format of a DF1 full-duplex message frame. The control symbols DLE STX bytes are sender symbols indicating the start of a message frame. The control symbols DLE ETX BCC (CRC) bytes are sender symbols that terminates a message frame. The bytes comprised in the command data field vary from command to command.
DLE STX DST SRC CMD STS TNS Command Data DLE ETX BCC(CRC)

NOTE The standard definitions of the control characters used by DF1 full-duplex protocol are listed below:

Abbreviation STX ETX ENQ ACK DLE NAK

Hexadecimal Value 02 03 05 06 10 0F

DF1 Device Address


Configuration of the DF1 device address is available through the Ingersoll-Rand UCMWizard Tool and will be configured by a certified Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative. CAUTION

The UCM must be configured to have the same node address as 1770-KF2 interface module. Otherwise, the DF1 messages will not be relayed to the IRBUS port of the UCM.

Destination (DST) Byte


This byte indicates the destination node address for the message. For a command message, it will be the address of the 1770-KF2 module. The UCM must have the same address as the 1770-KF2, which can be configured using the Ingersoll-Rand UCM-wizard software.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Source (SRC) Byte
This byte indicates the source node address of the message. If the command is initiated from an Allen-Bradley PLC, the SRC byte will be the address of the processor module.

111

Command (CMD) and Function (FNC) Bytes


The CMD byte defines the command type. The FNC byte defines the specific function under that command type. These bytes together define the activity being performed by the command message at the destination node. The message format depends on the CMD and FNC values. CMD Byte
Bit: 7 0 6 0:Command msg 1:Reply msg 5 0: normal priority(for DH+) 1: high priority(only applies to DH link) 4 0 3 2 1 0 Command code

From the figure above, the CMD byte of a reply message for DH+ network is always 40h ORed with the CMD byte of its original command message.

Status (STS) Byte - Status Error Code


Bit: 7 6 5 4 Remote Error Nibble 3 2 1 0 Local Error Nibble

Bits 7, 6, 5, and 4 are used to report remote errors - errors that occur when the command executor at the destination node tries to execute the command message. Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 are used to report local errors - errors found by the local source node and code 09h through 0Fh are not used. The UCM-DF1 driver uses mainly the higher nibble to report errors occur in CMC. A special error code with non-zero local error nibble, 3Fh, is used to report errors caused by illegal CMC data table address or count. The maximum number of data table entries allowed to be read or set for CMC is 16 currently. If a read command requests more than 16 data items from CMC, an exception response of 3Fh will be returned. Following is a list of status error code supported by the UCM-DF1 driver:

Transaction (TNS) Bytes


The two TNS bytes contain a unique 16-bit transaction identifier. Generate this number by maintaining a 16-bit counter. Increment the counter each time your command initiator creates a new message, and store the counter value in the two TNS bytes of the new message. You must use only one TNS counter in a multi-tasking environment. If the command initiator is an Allen-Bradley PLC, the PLC will maintain the counter internally. The reply message should have the same TNS value as the original command message. The UCM-DF1 driver copies the original TNS field of the command message into the TNS field of the corresponding reply message.

BCC (Block Check Character) and CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)


At the end of each DF1 command message, there is a one-byte BCC field, or a two-byte CRC field for error checking. These bytes allow you to verify the accuracy of each message frame transmission. SW-1 of 1770-KF2 module allows you to select BCC or CRC error 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

112

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


checking for the command messages sent to CMC. The Ingersoll-Rand UCM-wizard software allows you to configure BCC or CRC error checking for the UCM-DF1 driver, which needs to be the same error checking method as 1770-KF2.

BCC (One Byte) The BCC field contains the 2s compliment of the 8-bit sum of all data bytes between DLE STX and DLE ETX BCC control characters. BCC provides a medium level of data security. It cannot detect either the transposition of bytes during transmission nor the insertion or deletion of the value zero within a message frame. Another way to quickly determine a BCC value, add up the hex values of all data bytes between DLE STX and DLE ETX BCC in the message frame. If the total is greater than 100h, drop the most significant digit, and then subtract the result from 100h. This gives you the BCC. CRC (Two Bytes) This provides a higher level of data security than BCC but is more difficult to implement. All the data bytes between DLE STX and DLE ETX CRC plus the ETX byte are used to calculate the CRC value. The following explains how to calculate the CRC value: Before starting the calculation, a 16-bit register used to store the CRC value is cleared to be zero. As a byte is fetched from the data buffer, it is XORed (least-significant bit to the right) with the right eight bits of the CRC register. The result is placed in the right eight bits of the CRC register. Inserting 0s on the left then shifts the 16-bit CRC Register right eight times. Each time a 1 is shifted out on the right, the CRC register is XORed with a 16-bit constant A0-01h. As each additional byte is fetched, it is included in the value in the register the same way. After the ETX byte transmitted is also included in the calculation, the CRC calculation is complete. The 16-bit CRC value is transmitted low byte first then high byte.

Comparing the calculated BCC/CRC bytes with the received BCC/CRC bytes always validates the DF1 messages received by UCM. CAUTION

To transmit the data value of 10 hex, you must use the data symbol DLE DLE (double-stuffing DLEs). However, only one of these DLE bytes is included in the BCC/CRC calculation. However, if your BCC check sum is 10 hex, send it as DLE and not DLE DLE.

The rest of this section explains the meaning of the data bytes between DLE STX and DLE ETX BCC/CRC control characters. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Usually, a command message stripping off the control characters has the following format,
DST SRC CMD STS TNS command specific data packet

113

a reply message to a read command has the format below,


SRC DST CMD STS TNS command specific data packet

a reply message to a write command has the following format,


SRC DST CMD STS TNS

The DST and SRC bytes of a reply message are formed by interchanging the DST and SRC bytes of the corresponding command message. The combination of SRC, CMD, and TNS bytes uniquely identifies every message packet. If all fields are the same, the message is considered to be a duplicate. The UCM-DF1 driver does not detect duplicate messages.

Data Addressing
The CMC is primarily a 32-bit floating-point microprocessor controller. We support two methods for determining the analog data value. These methods are two 16-bit integers representing the integer and fraction part of the number and one 32-bit IEEE floating point number. (NOTE: If you use the 16-bit system, you must get two 16-bit numbers and combine them into one 32-bit floating point number.) The UCM-DF1 interface can prepare data as either two 16-bit integers or one 32-bit floating point number with respect to the received DF1 command. The Allen-Bradley PLC floating point format is a subset of IEEE STD 754-1985. Accessing data from the CMC via DF1 interface emulates accessing data from a PLC5 or SLC5/04. In SLC 5/04, each data file can hold up to 256 data elements (element number: 0255) and the file number has to be in the same range (0-255). The UCM-DF1 addressing scheme uses this file/element structure and complies with the SLC5/04s limits on file number and element number. Please see next section for details. A DF1 command initiator is a device on the DH+ network that initiates the query or set commands to the CMC. It can be an Allen-Bradley PLC or other device that can send/receive a PLC5 Typed Read (Write) or SLC Typed Logical Read (Write) command/response.

CMC as PLC5
As to treating CMC as a PLC5, the command initiator can issue a PLC5 Typed Read (Write) command to the CMC. Please see the section on Supported Functions for detailed message format. For a PLC5 Typed Write command, the data can be sent as either two 16-bit integers or one 32-bit floating point. If a PLC5 or SLC5/04 issues the command, the setpoint data type is determined by the local data file type used to store it. The PLC5 Typed Read commands for requesting data in integer or float format is exactly the same messages. The UCM-DF1 driver cannot tell the requested data type from the command bytes received. Therefore, the returned data type has to be pre-configured in 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

114

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


UCM via the Ingersoll-Rand UCM-wizard tool. Default is the integer type. If a PLC5 or SLC5/04 issues the command, the local data file used to store the gathered data should be the same type. Otherwise, you get erroneous data or an error status code due to data type mismatch.

CMC as SLC5/04
As to treating CMC as a SLC5/04, the command initiator can issue a SLC Typed Logical Read (Write) command to the CMC. Please see the section on Supported Functions for detailed message format. If the command initiator is another SLC5/04, you can do either integer or float data type. However, if the command initiator is a PLC5, only integer type is supported for the time being.

Data File Addressing for PLC5/SLC504


When RSLogix software is used to program message instructions in PLC for sending read/write commands to the CMC, the target data table address is in the form of either Fxx:yyy or Nxx:yyy, where xx is the file number (10-14) and yyy (0-255) is the corresponding CMC data table address. The target file type (F for float, N for integer) should be consistent with the local file type. The UCM-DF1 interface designates file number 10 for discrete usage (read only). Each element represents 16 Boolean data bit-packed together in two bytes. File type can be either N (integer) or B (bit) type. The following table shows the address in file 10 for discrete values.
PLC File Address B10:10 B10:11 B10:12 B10:13 CMC Data Table Address (decimal) 160-175 176-191 192-207 208-223 16 Discretes Packed as Binary Bits in Two Bytes 10 9 8 7 6 5 170 169 168 167 166 165 186 185 184 183 182 181 202 201 200 199 198 197 218 217 216 215 214 213

15 175 191 207 223

14 174 190 206 222

13 173 189 205 221

12 172 188 204 220

11 171 187 203 219

4 164 180 196 212

3 163 179 195 211

2 162 178 194 210

1 161 177 193 209

0 160 176 192 208

Bit 10-15 of integer element 10 in data file 10 represents digital input channels 1-6 (CMC data table address 170-175). Bit 0-9 of integer element 11 represent digital input channels 716 (CMC data table address 176-185). Bit 10-15 of integer element 11 represents digital output channels 1-6 (CMC data table address 186-191). Bit 0-9 of integer element 12 represent digital output channels 7-16 (CMC data table address 192-201). Bit 10-15 of integer element 11 represents digital output channels 1-6 (CMC data table address 186191). Bit 10-15 of integer element 12 and bit 0-10 of integer element 13 represent various compressor states (CMC data table address 202-218). Currently, CMC data table has 512 entries. In order to satisfy the (0-255) limit of elements per data file for SLC5/04, the CMC data table is divided into two segments; each has 256 entries. File number 11 is designated to the first 256 entries. File number 12 is for the second 256 entries. If the CMC data table gets expanded later, the subsequent file number will be used. According to the above, N11:170 refers to the 170-th item in the CMC data table, which is the digital input channel 1. Similarly, N12:170 will be the 426-th = (170+256) item in the CMC data table. If an invalid file or element number is used, you will get a 3Fh-status error code. See the status error code section for details. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

115

The number of bytes per element is 2 for integer type and 4 for float type. The assigned message length in elements for local data file should be a multiple of 2 for integer type. If it is an odd number, only the 2-byte integer (whole) part will be transmitted for the last data item. Since the CMC has programmable analog and discrete inputs and outputs, the programmer must use the electrical schematic supplied with the contract to determine which function name and units of measure are associated with each input and output.

CMC Data Addressing


Refer to the table below for data addresses supported by the UCM-DF1 Interface.
Data Data Address Address Description (decimal) (hex) 1 01 Analog Input, Ch 1 (J2-P1,3) 2 02 Analog Input, Ch 2 (J2-P5,7) 3 03 Analog Input, Ch 3 (J1-P1) 4 04 Analog Input, Ch 4 (J1-P4) 5 05 Analog Input, Ch 5 (J1-P5) 6 06 Analog Input, Ch 6 (J1-P8) 7 07 Analog Input, Ch 7 (J1-P9) 8 08 Analog Input, Ch 8 (J1-P12) 9 09 Analog Input, Ch 9 (J1-P13) 10 0A Analog Input, Ch 10 (J1-P16) 11 0B Analog Input, Ch 11 (J1-P17) 12 0C Analog Input, Ch 12 (J1-P20) 13 0D Analog Input, Ch 13 (J1-P21) 14 0E Analog Input, Ch 14 (J1-P24) 15 0F Analog Input, Ch 15 (J1-P25) 16 10 Analog Input, Ch 16 (J1-P28) 17 11 Analog Input, Ch 17 (J1-P29) 18 12 Analog Input, Ch 18 (J1-P32) 19 13 Analog Input, Ch 19 (J1-P33) 20 14 Analog Input, Ch 20 (J1-P36) 21 15 Analog Input, Ch 21 (J1-P37) 22 16 Analog Input, Ch 22 (J1-P40) 23 17 Analog Input, Ch 23 (J1-P41) 24 18 CT Input (J9-P1,2) 25 19 Reserved 26 1A Analog Output, Ch 1 (J3-P1,3) 27 1B Analog Output, Ch 2 (J3-P4,6) 28 1C Analog Output, Ch 3 (J3-P7,9) 29 1D Analog Output, Ch 4 (J3-P10,12) 30 1E Analog Input, Ch 1 (J2-P1,3) Hi Trip Setpoint 31 1F Analog Input, Ch 1 (J2-P1,3) Hi Alarm Setpoint 32 20 Analog Input, Ch 1 (J2-P1,3) Lo Alarm Setpoint 33 21 Analog Input, Ch 1 (J2-P1,3) Lo Trip Setpoint 34 22 Analog Input, Ch 2 (J2-P5,7) Hi Trip Setpoint 35 23 Analog Input, Ch 2 (J2-P5,7) Hi Alarm Setpoint 36 24 Analog Input, Ch 2 (J2-P5,7) Lo Alarm Setpoint 37 25 Analog Input, Ch 2 (J2-P5,7) Lo Trip Setpoint 38 26 Analog Input, Ch 3 (J1-P1) Hi Trip Setpoint 39 27 Analog Input, Ch 3 (J1-P1) Hi Alarm Setpoint 40 28 Analog Input, Ch 3 (J1-P1) Lo Alarm Setpoint Data Address (decimal) 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 Data Address (hex) 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 Description Analog Input, Ch 4 (J1-P4) Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 4 (J1-P4) Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 4 (J1-P4) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 4 (J1-P4) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 5 (J1-P5) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 5 (J1-P5) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 5 (J1-P5) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 5 (J1-P5) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 6 (J1-P8) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 6 (J1-P8) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 6 (J1-P8) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 6 (J1-P8) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 7 (J1-P9) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 7 (J1-P9) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 7 (J1-P9) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 7 (J1-P9) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 8 (J1-P12) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 8 (J1-P12) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 8 (J1-P12) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 8 (J1-P12) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 9 (J1-P13) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 9 (J1-P13) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 9 (J1-P13) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 9 (J1-P13) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 10 (J1-P16) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 10 (J1-P16) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 10 (J1-P16) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 10 (J1-P16) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 11 (J1-P17) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 11 (J1-P17) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 11 (J1-P17) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 11 (J1-P17) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 12 (J1-P20) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 12 (J1-P20) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 12 (J1-P20) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 12 (J1-P20) - Lo Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 13 (J1-P21) - Hi Trip Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 13 (J1-P21) - Hi Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 13 (J1-P21) - Lo Alarm Setpoint Analog Input, Ch 13 (J1-P21) - Lo Trip Setpoint

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

116
41 29 Analog Input, Ch 3 (J1-P1) Lo Trip Setpoint

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


82 52 Analog Input, Ch 14 (J1-P24) - Hi Trip Setpoint

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

117

Data Data Address Address Description (decimal) (hex) 83 53 Analog Input, Ch 14 (J1-P24) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 84 54 Analog Input, Ch 14 (J1-P24) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 85 55 Analog Input, Ch 14 (J1-P24) - Lo Trip Setpoint 86 56 Analog Input, Ch 15 (J1-P25) - Hi Trip Setpoint 87 57 Analog Input, Ch 15 (J1-P25) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 88 58 Analog Input, Ch 15 (J1-P25) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 89 59 Analog Input, Ch 15 (J1-P25) - Lo Trip Setpoint 90 5A Analog Input, Ch 16 (J1-P28) - Hi Trip Setpoint 91 5B Analog Input, Ch 16 (J1-P28) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 92 5C Analog Input, Ch 16 (J1-P28) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 93 5D Analog Input, Ch 16 (J1-P28) - Lo Trip Setpoint 94 5E Analog Input, Ch 17 (J1-P29) - Hi Trip Setpoint 95 5F Analog Input, Ch 17 (J1-P29) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 96 60 Analog Input, Ch 17 (J1-P29) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 97 61 Analog Input, Ch 17 (J1-P29) - Lo Trip Setpoint 98 62 Analog Input, Ch 18 (J1-P32) - Hi Trip Setpoint 99 63 Analog Input, Ch 18 (J1-P32) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 100 64 Analog Input, Ch 18 (J1-P32) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 101 65 Analog Input, Ch 18 (J1-P32) - Lo Trip Setpoint 102 66 Analog Input, Ch 19 (J1-P33) - Hi Trip Setpoint 103 67 Analog Input, Ch 19 (J1-P33) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 104 68 Analog Input, Ch 19 (J1-P33) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 105 69 Analog Input, Ch 19 (J1-P33) - Lo Trip Setpoint 106 6A Analog Input, Ch 20 (J1-P36) - Hi Trip Setpoint 107 6B Analog Input, Ch 20 (J1-P36) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 108 6C Analog Input, Ch 20 (J1-P36) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 109 6D Analog Input, Ch 20 (J1-P36) - Lo Trip Setpoint 110 6E Analog Input, Ch 21 (J1-P37) - Hi Trip Setpoint 111 6F Analog Input, Ch 21 (J1-P37) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 112 70 Analog Input, Ch 21 (J1-P37) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 113 71 Analog Input, Ch 21 (J1-P37) - Lo Trip Setpoint 114 72 Analog Input, Ch 22 (J1-P40) - Hi Trip Setpoint 115 73 Analog Input, Ch 22 (J1-P40) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 116 74 Analog Input, Ch 22 (J1-P40) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 117 75 Analog Input, Ch 22 (J1-P40) - Lo Trip Setpoint 118 76 Analog Input, Ch 23 (J1-P41) - Hi Trip Setpoint 119 77 Analog Input, Ch 23 (J1-P41) - Hi Alarm Setpoint 120 78 Analog Input, Ch 23 (J1-P41) - Lo Alarm Setpoint 121 79 Analog Input, Ch 23 (J1-P41) - Lo Trip Setpoint 122 7A Reserved 123 7B Reserved 124 7C Reserved 125 7D Reserved 126 7E Reserved 127 7F Reserved 128 80 Reserved 129 81 Reserved 130 82 Reserved 131 83 Surge Pressure Rate

Data Address (decimal) 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190

Data Address (hex) 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE

Description Start Timer CT Ratio Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Power on hours Running Hours Loaded Hours Number of starts Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Inlet Valve Proportional Constant Inlet Valve Integral Constant Reserved Bypass Valve Proportional Constant Bypass Valve Integral Constant Reserved Reserved Compressor Control Mode Digital Input, Ch 1 (J4-P2) Digital Input, Ch 2 (J4-P3) Digital Input, Ch 3 (J4-P4) Digital Input, Ch 4 (J4-P5) Digital Input, Ch 5 (J4-P6) Digital Input, Ch 6 (J4-P7) Digital Input, Ch 7 (J4-P8) Digital Input, Ch 8 (J4-P9) Digital Input, Ch 9 (J5-P2) Digital Input, Ch 10 (J5-P3) Digital Input, Ch 11 (J5-P4) Digital Input, Ch 12 (J5-P5) Digital Input, Ch 13 (J5-P6) Digital Input, Ch 14 (J5-P7) Digital Input, Ch 15 (J5-P8) Digital Input, Ch 16 (J5-P9) Digital Output, Ch 1 (J15-P7,8) Digital Output, Ch 2 (J15-P5,6) Digital Output, Ch 3 (J15-P3,4) Digital Output, Ch 4 (J15-P1,2) Digital Output, Ch 5 (J14-P7,8)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

118
132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D Surge Current Rate Motor Current User Pressure Setpoint MinLoad (Throttle Limit, TL) MaxLoad (High Load Limit, HLL) Autodual Reload Percent Autodual Unload Point Autodual Unload Timer Pressure Setpoint Ramp Rate Inlet Valve Unload Position

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Digital Output, Ch 6 (J14-P5,6) Digital Output, Ch 7 (J14-P3,4) Digital Output, Ch 8 (J14-P1,2) Digital Output, Ch 9 (J13-P7,8) Digital Output, Ch 10 (J13-P5,6) Digital Output, Ch 11 (J13-P3,4) Digital Output, Ch 12 (J13-P1,2) Digital Output, Ch 13 (J12-P7,8) Digital Output, Ch 14 (J12-P5,6) Digital Output, Ch 15 (J12-P3,4)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

119

Data Data Address Address Description (decimal) (hex) 201 C9 Digital Output, Ch 16 (J12-P1,2) 202 CA Compressor State - Waiting 203 CB Compressor State - Coasting 204 CC Compressor State Starting 205 CD Compressor State - Not Ready 206 CE Compressor State - Ready 207 CF Compressor State - Surge Unload 208 D0 Compressor State - Autodual Unload 209 D1 Compressor State - Unloading 210 D2 Compressor State - Unloaded 211 D3 Compressor State - Min load 212 D4 Compressor State - Max load

Data Address (decimal) 213 214 215 216 217 218 220 221 222 223 224 225

Data Address (hex) D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DC DD DE DF E0 E1

Description Compressor State - Loading Compressor State - Loaded Compressor State - Full Load Compressor State - Analog Input Failed Any Compressor Trip Any Compressor Alarm Remote Acknowledge Remote Reset Remote Load Remote Unload Remote Start Remote Stop

Supported Functions
The listing below shows the DF1 commands supported by the CMC Microcontroller.
Command Code (hex) 0F 0F 0F 0F Function Code (hex) 68 67 A2 AA Function Name PLC5 Typed Read PLC5 Typed Write SLC Typed Logical Read SLC Typed Logical Write

Command 0F/Function 68 - PLC5 Typed Read


The CMC is treated as a PLC5 when this command is issued. This command reads a block of data from CMC starting at a specified data table address. As to the format of floating point number, Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol always put low byte first then high byte, low word first then high word, which is different from the UCM-MODBUS protocol. The byte format for a floating point value, 105.4, is differentiated between the two interfaces as below (Byte 1 to 4 is in the order of transmission):
Protocol UCM-MODBUS UCM-DF1 Floating Point Byte Representation Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 42 D2 CC CD CD CC D2 42

Example: Reading an Analog Input After reviewing the Electrical Schematic for your compressor, you determine that the analog input for system pressure is located on J1-P1 (Channel 3). From the CMC data table above, the address is 03h. The UCM should be configured to represent data type as desired. Following is a table illustrating how the PLC5 system address is mapped to the CMC data table address.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

120
CMC Data Address 3 254 255 256 259 PLC5 Target Data Table Address N11:3 N11:254 N11:255 N12:0 N12:3

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


PLC5 System Address Element File Number 00 0B 03 00 0B FE 00 0B FF FF 00 0C 00 00 0C 03

07 07 07 07 07

00

As 16-Bit Integer and Fraction To get the reading of system pressure as 16-bit integer and 16-bit fraction, the following command is issued (data are presented in hexadecimal format):
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 21 BD FN C 68 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 02 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B 03 02 Size 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 74

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 21 BD A 99 09 05 42 64 00 B 5C 09 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 03

In the response above, the first two bytes (low byte first then high byte) in field B is the integer portion of the system pressure (00-64h, 100 decimal). The second two bytes in field B are the fraction portion of the system pressure (09-5Ch, 2396 decimal). Each fraction has a range between 0 and 9999. So the system pressure, expressed as a floating-point number, is 100.2396 PSIG. The following table contains a list of data types and the ID value of each supported by AllenBradley DF1 protocol:
Data Type ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 15 16 Data Type bit bit string byte (or character) string integer Allen-Bradley timer Allen-Bradley counter Allen-Bradley general control structure IEEE floating point array of similar elements address data binary-coded decimal (BCD)

The first byte, 99h, in field A of the above response message is a flag byte, which has the format below:
Bit: 7 1 Data Type ID 6 5 0 0 4 1 3 1 Data Type Size 2 1 0 0 0 1

If the data type ID is greater than 7, set bit 7 of this flag byte to 1 and insert the number of bytes to follow that contains the data type ID value in bits 4, 5, and 6. These additional ID bytes follow directly after the flag byte. In the above response message, the additional one byte is 09h, which means array of similar elements. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

121

If the data type defined uses more than 7 bytes for each data element, enter 1 in bit 3 of the flag byte and enter the number of bytes to follow that contains the number of bytes used for each data element. These additional size bytes follow the flag byte and any ID bytes. The individual bytes in field A and B of the above response message is explained in the following table:
Field Byte (hex) 99 09 05 42 Definition flag byte data type ID byte: array of similar elements number of bytes to follow descriptor byte 4: type ID for integer 2: two bytes per element 4 data bytes

64 00 5C 09

As IEEE 32-Bit Floating Point Number If the UCM is configured to read data as floating point, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 21 BD FN C 68 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 01 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B 03 01 Size 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 21 BD 99 09 A 06 B 94 08 C6 D4 DC 42 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC

The individual bytes in field A and B of the above response message is explained in the table below:
Field Byte (hex) 99 09 06 94 means flag byte data type ID byte: array of similar elements number of bytes to follow descriptor byte 9: one byte to follow 4: four bytes per element type ID for floating point 4 data bytes

08 C6 D4 DC 42

After the proper byte swapping, the system pressure (42-DC-D4-C6), expressed as a floating point number is 110.4155731201 PSIG. IEEE floating-point numbers are represented in 32 bits as shown below.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

122
31 30 29 28 27 26 exponent sign 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
6

mantissa

Convert hexadecimal words 1 and 2 (W1, W2) into decimal values ...
Word Lo 1 Lo 1 Hi 2 Hi 2 Byte Lo Hi Lo Hi Symbol W1LB W1HB W2LB W2HB Hex C6 D4 DC 42 Decimal 198 212 220 66

Determine the sign (positive = 0 or negative = 1) ... Sign = (W2HB And 128) / 128, where And is defined as a bit-wise And Sign = (66 And 128) / 128 = 0 Determine the exponent ... Exponent = ((W2HB And 127) * 2) + INT (W2LB / 128), where INT is defined as INTEGER Exponent = ((66 And 127) * 2) + INT (220/128) = 133 Determine the mantissa... Mantissa = ((((W2LB And 127) * 256) + W1HB) * 256) + W1LB Mantissa = ((((220 And 127) * 256) + 212) * 256) + 198 = 6083782 Putting the 32 bit IEEE value together... Value = (-1sign) * (2(exponent - 127)) * ((Mantissa * 2-23) + 1) Value = (-10) * (2(133- 127)) * ((6083782 * 2-23) + 1) = 110.4155731201 NOTE When Sign = Exponent = Mantissa = 0, Value = 0. This is a special case for the above equation.

Example: Read Multiple Analog Channels The procedure for reading multiple channels is the same as reading a single channel with the exception of requesting more data. The message length in elements should be set as desired but no more than 16 data at a time, because IRBUS can handle at most 16 data in one query for the time being. NOTE You must read a contiguous group of data (channels) for a single command.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Example: Reading a Discrete Value Reading discrete values from file number 11 or higher is the same as reading analog data. To read a digital output (Channel 3, 188h) as a two-byte integer, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS A1 C2 FN C 68 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 01 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B BC 01 Size 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 38

123

The response to this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS A1 C2 A 99 09 03 42 01 B 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 48

Example: Reading Multiple Discrete Values To read digital output channels 1-6 as integers, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 41 17 FN C 68 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 0C 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B BA 0C Size 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 2F

The response to this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 41 17 A 99 09 19 42 00 00 00 00 00 00 B 00 00 01 00 00 00

B 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC 3D

Example: Reading Bit-Packed Discrete Data Reading discrete values from file number 10 is to read the 16 bit-packed discrete values in a two-byte integer format. When the following command is sent,
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 61 C4 FN C 68 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 01 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0A 0B 01 Size 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 28

the response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 61 C4 A 99 09 03 42 28 B 10 10 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 4F

NOTE The data value 10h in field B is transmitted as 10h 10h to be distinguished from the control character DLE. Please see the DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol Message Frames section for more details.

In the above example, the local data file type can be either bit or integer types. Local data element B10:11 covers CMC data table address 176-191. Bit 10-15 is for digital output channels 1-6. You can determine the remote trouble contact (Channel 3, J15-P3,4) by bit 12 in the returned integer. The table below graphically depicts the individual bit value for the returned two-byte integer. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

124
Response (hex) Bit CMC Data Address Bit CMC Data Address Byte 2 10 7 183 0 15 191 0

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


6 182 0 14 190 0 5 181 1 13 189 0 4 180 0 12 188 1 3 179 1 11 187 0 2 178 0 10 186 0 1 177 0 9 185 0 0 176 0 8 184 0

Byte 1

28

A bit response of 1 means that the output is ON and a response of 0 means that the output is OFF.

Command 0F/Function 67 - PLC5 Typed Write

CAUTION

The position of the REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch is NOT considered when forcing coils or writing registers to the CMC. Reads and Writes are always enabled. Repeatedly writing a value to a register or forcing a coil without regard to the position of the switch can effectively disable a local write. Please use caution when writing registers or forcing coils.

The CMC is treated as a PLC5 when this command is issued. This command writes data to the CMC starting at the specified data table address. You can write to a setpoint with either an integer or floating point number. Example: Presetting Analog Setpoints for 32-bit Values To write 105.4 PSIG as a floating point number to the user pressure setpoint (CMC data table address, 86h), issue the following command:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 81 CE FN C 67 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 01 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B 86

99

09

A 06

B 94 08 CD CC D2 42

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC 93

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 81 CE DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 44

The difficulty in setting 32-bit values is determining the four data bytes for the number you want to send. The process required is ... 1. Determine the sign (positive = 0 or negative = 1). This is the first bit. 2. Divide the decimal value by 2 until the result is less than 2, but greater than 1. Count the number of iterations required. Add 127 to the number of iterations. This result is the exponent. Convert this result to binary. These are the next eight bits. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

125

3. From the result obtained from step 2, subtract 1. Then, multiply this result by 2. If the result is less than 1, then the value of the first mantissa bit is 0. Otherwise, the mantissa bit is 1. If the result is greater than or equal to 1, then subtract 1 from the result and proceed with step 3 until the result is 0 or you have gone through this process 23 times. 4. Combine all 32 bits from the steps above and convert this value to hexadecimal. These 32 bits are the 4 hexadecimal data bytes needed for the command. As an example, we will start with the decimal value of 105.4. 1. Since this is a positive number, the first bit is 0. 2. Determine the exponent bits by ...
Iteration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Decimal 105.40000 52.70000 26.35000 13.17500 6.58750 3.29375 / / / / / / 2 2 2 2 2 2 = = = = = = Result 52.700000 26.350000 13.175000 6.587500 3.293750 1.646875

It took us six iterations to get the result to a number that is less than two and greater than or equal to one. Now, we must add 127 for an exponent of 133. Converting this to binary, the next eight bits are represented as 10000101. 3. Determine the mantissa bits by ...
Iteration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Decimal Operation Result 1.646875 - 1 * 2 = 1.29375 1.29375 - 1 * 2 = 0.5875 0.5875 *2= 1.175 1.175 -1*2= 0.35 0.35 *2= 0.7 0.7 *2= 1.4 1.4 -1*2= 0.8 0.8 *2= 1.6 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 0.4 *2= 0.8 0.8 *2= 1.6 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 0.4 *2= 0.8 0.8 *2= 1.6 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 0.4 *2= 0.8 0.8 *2= 1.6 1.6 -1*2= 1.2 1.2 -1*2= 0.4 0.4 *2= 0.8 Bit 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

From the table above, 10100101100110011001100 represent the next 23 bits. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

126

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

4. Combining the bits in sign, exponent and then mantissa order ... 0100-0010-1101-0010-1100-1100-1100-1100 This converts to 42-D2-CC-CC in hexadecimal. To conform to DF1 floating point format, the bytes are swapped as CC-CC-D2-42. Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Analog Setpoint To change the integer and fraction value for the user pressure setpoint to 105.4 PSIG, issue the command below. The integer portion of the number 105 (00-69h) and the fraction 0.4 is converted to 4000 (0F-A0h). These four bytes are placed in field B in the order of (69-00-A00F).
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 41 D0 FN C 67 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 02 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B 86

A 99 09 05 42 69 00

B A0 0F

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC C0

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 41 D0 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 82

Example: Forcing a Coil Forcing a single coil to either ON or OFF. Refer to the table below for each coil supported by the UCM-DF1 interface. An integer value of one or greater forces the coil to be ON. An integer value of zero forces the coil to be OFF.
CMC Data Table Address (decimal) 220 221 222 223 224 225 CMC Data Table Address (hex) DC DD DE DF E0 E1 Coil Name (Write only) Remote Acknowledge Remote Reset Remote Load Remote Unload Remote Start Remote Stop

NOTE For the CMC, forcing the above listed coils OFF is not meaningful because the default state of each of the above coils is OFF. When using these commands, they should be sent once (momentary) and the CMC will execute the commands.

NOTE 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

127

This function will override the CMCs current state. The forced state will remain valid until the CMC next solves the coil. The coil will remain forced if it is not programmed in the controller's logic.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

128

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

CAUTION

For all of the Remote Coils, the compressors REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS DISABLED/ENABLED selector switch must be in the ENABLED position for these commands to execute. When DISABLED, the CMC ignores these coils being forced ON.

To remotely acknowledge the compressors alarm or trip condition, the following command is issued:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS E1 F8 FN C 67 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 01 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B DC

A 99 09 03 42 01

B 00

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC BC

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS E1 F8 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC BA

The following command works the same:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC 11 CMD 0F STS 00 TNS 41 E3 FN C 67 Packet Offset 00 00 Total Trans 02 00 PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B DC

A 99 09 05 42 01 00

B 00 00

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC 6E

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 41 E3 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 6F

Example: Forcing Multiple Coils Forces each coil in a series of contiguous coils to either ON or OFF. Refer to the data table above for a coil list supported by the UCM-DF1 Interface. NOTE This function will override the CMCs current state. The forced state will remain valid until the CMC next solves the coil. The coil will remain forced if it is not programmed in the controller's logic.

To force a reset (CMC data table address, DDh) and start (CMC data table address, E0h) of the compressor the following command is sent: 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

129

DLE 10

STX 02

DST 0D

SRC 11

CMD 0F

STS 00

TNS 21 0C

FN C 67

Packet Offset 00 00

Total Trans 08 00

PLC5 System Address 07 00 0B DD

A 99 09 11 42 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00

B 01

00

00

00

01

00

00

00

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC 4F

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 11 SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS 21 0C DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 66

The number of contiguous coils is four (DD, DE, DF, and E0h). The message length of integer elements is 8 and the number of data bytes in field B is 16.

Command 0F/Function A2 - SLC Typed Logical Read


The CMC is treated as an SLC5/04 when this command is issued. This function reads a block of data from CMC starting at a specified data table address. Example: Reading an Analog Value To read the pressure setpoint (CMC data table address 86h) as a floating point number, the following command is issued:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS D4 19 FNC A2 Byte Size 04 File No. 0B File Type 8A Ele No. 86 S/Ele No. 00 DLE ETX 10 03 BCC 2B

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS D4 19 CD CC Data D2 42 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC FF

The important command bytes are explained below:


Field Byte Size File Number File Type Description The number of data bytes to be read. Address files 0-255 only. For CMC, file 10 is designated for discrete only. File (11+N) is for the (N+1) th 256 entries in the CMC data table. 85h: bit 89h: integer 8Ah: float Address elements 0-255 only. The address byte format is the same as PLC5 for CMC. 254: (FE) 255: (FF-FF-00) Not used, always 00h.

Element Number

Sub-Element Number

The four bytes in data field of the response message is converted to a floating point number, 105.4 PSIG. To read the pressure setpoint value as integer, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS D4 27 FNC A2 Byte Size 04 File No. 0B File Type 89 Ele No. 86 S/Ele No. 00 DLE ETX 10 03 BCC 1E

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

130

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS D4 27 69 00 Data A0 0F DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 86

The first two bytes in data field represent the integer portion, 106 (00-69h), of the setpoint. The second two bytes represent the fraction portion, 4000 (0F-A0h), of the setpoint. Example: Reading Multiple Analog Values The following command reads analog inputs channels 3-9 as integer:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS D5 A9 FNC A2 Byte Size 1C File No. 0B File Ele Type No. 89 03 S/Ele No. 00 DLE ETX 10 03 BCC 06

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS D5 A9 63 00 5C 21 09 00 0F 0A Data 20 00 D6 00 62 00 E7 0B

00

00

FF

0B

2E

Data 00 66

14

BC

00

83

1E

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC C0

Example: Reading Single Discrete Data After reviewing the Electrical Schematic for your compressor, you determine that the digital input for emergency stop push button is located on J4-P5 (Channel 4). The CMC data table address is ADh for the input in question. Therefore, to read the state of the emergency stop push button as a two byte integer, the following command is issued:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS D6 79 FNC A2 Byte Size 02 File No. 0B File Ele Type No. 89 AD S/Ele No. 00 DLE ETX 10 03 BCC A5

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS D6 79 Data 01 00 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 49

The data response (01) means that the input is ON, or the emergency stop push button is pressed. Example: Reading 16 Bit-Packed Discrete Data To read 16 bit-packed discrete values for digital outputs as a two-byte integer, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E1 41 FNC A2 Byte Size 02 File No. 0A File Ele Type No. 85 0B S/Ele No. 00 DLE ETX 10 03 BCC 79

Note that the file number must be 10. The local data file used to store the returned data can be either bit (85h) or integer (89h) type. The response from this command is:
DLE STX DST SRC CMD STS TNS Data DLE ETX BCC

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


10 02 0B 0D 4F 00 E1 41 28 10 10 10 03 3F

131

Please refer to the PLC5 Typed Read command section for the method to interpret the 16bit discrete values.

Command 0F/Function AA - SLC Typed Logical Write


The CMC is treated as a SLC5/04 when this command is issued. This command writes a block of data to CMC starting at a specified data table address. You can write to a setpoint with either an integer or floating point number. Example: Presetting Analog Setpoint for 32-bit Value To write 105.4 PSIG as a floating point number to the user pressure setpoint (CMC data table address, 86h), issue the following command:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E1 70 FNC AA Byte Size 04 File No. 0B File Ele Type No. 8A 86 S/Ele No. 00 Data CD CC D2 42 DLE 10 ETX BCC 03 12

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS E1 70 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 48

Example: Presetting a 16-bit Integer and 16-bit Fraction Analog Setpoint To change the integer and fraction value for the user pressure setpoint to 105.4 PSIG, issue the command below. The integer portion of the number 105 (00-69h) and the fraction 0.4 is converted to 4000 (0F-A0h). These four bytes are placed in field B in the order of (69-00-A00Fh).
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E1 82 FNC AA Byte Size 04 File No. 0B File Ele Type No. 89 86 S/Ele No. 00 Data 69 00 A0 0F DLE 10 ETX BCC 03 96

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS E1 82 DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 36

Example: Forcing a Coil Forces a single coil to either ON or OFF. Refer to the CMC data table for each coil supported by the UCM-DF1 interface. See the same example in the PLC5 Typed Write command section for more details. To remotely acknowledge the compressors alarm or trip condition, the following command is issued:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E1 A3 FNC AA Byte Size 04 File No. 0B File Type 89 Ele No. DC S/Ele No. 00 Data 01 00 00 00 DLE 10 ETX BCC 03 36

The response from this command is:


DLE STX DST SRC CMD STS TNS DLE ETX BCC

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

132
10 02 0B 0D 4F

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


00 E1 A3 10 03 15

To remotely acknowledge the compressors alarm or trip condition, the following command works the same:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E1 AD FNC AA Byte Size 02 File No. 0B File Type 89 Ele No. DC S/Ele No. 00 Data 01 00 DLE 10 ETX BCC 03 2E

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS E1 AD DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 0B

Example: Forcing Multiple Coils Forces each coil in a series of contiguous coils to either ON or OFF. Refer to the CMC data table for a list of coils supported by the UCM-DF1 interface. To force a reset (CMC data table address, DDh) and start (E0h) of the compressor, the following command is sent:
DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0D SRC CMD STS 0B 0F 00 TNS E2 3A FNC AA Byte Size 10 10 File No. 0B File Type 89 Ele No. DD S/Ele No. 00 Data 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00

Data 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00

DLE 10

ETX 03

BCC 8E

NOTE The byte size value 10h is transmitted as 10h 10h to be distinguished from the control character DLE.

The response from this command is:


DLE 10 STX 02 DST 0B SRC 0D CMD 4F STS 00 TNS E2 3A DLE 10 ETX 03 BCC 7D

The number of contiguous coils is four (DD, DE, DF, and E0h). The assigned local message buffer length is 8 integer elements, which is 16-byte long.

Allen-Bradley SLC 504 Example Data Files

RSLogix 500 Ladder Diagram


The following ladder logic example is the fastest and most reliable method for gathering data from a CMC.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


First Pass S2:1 0000 15 MSG Read/Write Message Type Peer-To-Peer Read/Write Read Target Device 500CPU Local/Remote Local Control Block N7:0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen N7:0 0002 12 N7:0 0003 13 10 MSG Read/Write Message Type Peer-To-Peer Read/Write Read Target Device 500CPU Local/Remote Local Control Block N7:20 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen N7:20 10 N7:0 13 N7:20 10 N7:0

133

N7:0 U 15

0001

EN DN ER

N7:0 U 15

EN DN ER

N7:20 0004 12 N7:20 0005 13 0006

N7:20 U 15 N7:0 U 15 END

UCM STS Error Codes


STS Code (hex) 00 10 30 3F D0 E0 Definition Success - no error Illegal command or function Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shutdown Illegal CMC data address or count Illegal data type Cannot form CMC data table query/set list

NOTE The UCM-DF1 driver does not support EXT STS. According to Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol convention, EXT STS is part of the message only if STS = F0h. 1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

134

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

When the CMC receives a DF1 command without any communication error and the command is executed successfully, a normal response with status code 00h is returned. If the UCM dose not receive the command due to a communication error, no response is returned and the command initiator will eventually time out. If the UCM dose receive the command, but detects error (invalid BCC/CRC...), control characters DLE NAK is returned to the command initiator, which in turns retransmits the command message and restarts a time out to wait for the response. This can be repeated a few times depending on the limit preset for retransmission. Once the limit is exceeded, the command initiator is informed of the failure and proceeds to the next command. If the time out expired before a response is received, the command initiator sends out DLE ENQ control characters to request a retransmission of the last response. It restarts a time out and wait for the response. There is a limit on the number of inquiries allowed per command message. When this limit is exceeded, the command initiator proceeds to the next command. When UCM receives DLE ENQ or DLE NAK message, it resends the last response to the command initiator. When DLE ACK message is received by the UCM, no response is returned. When the UCM receives a command without any communication error, but cannot handle it, the UCM will return an exception response with the appropriate status code informing the command initiator of the nature of failure. NOTE The table below explains the meanings of different control symbols for DF1 protocol:

Control Symbol DLE ACK DLE NAK DLE ENQ

Definition a message frame has been successfully received a message frame was not received successfully request retransmission of a response from the destination node

Communication Parameters
Configuration of the UCM RS-422 ports communication speed (baud rate), parity, number of data bits, number of stop bits... is available through the Ingersoll-Rand UCM-Wizard Tool and will be configured by a certified Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative. The settings should be the same as the 1770-KF2 interface module.

Network Setup
The network diagram that follows depicts the communication interface between AllenBradley DF1 network and Ingersoll-Rand CMC Microcontroller. The 1770-KF2 always acts as a slave. The slave cannot initiate a command; i.e., the UCM cannot initiate a command over DH+ network. It only returns response messages to queries that are addressed to them individually. Broadcast is not supported over the DF1 network.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

135

CMC Panel
CENTAC

Microcontrol ler

Serial Port (COM1)

INGERSOLL-RAND Service Tool Base Control Module (BCM)

RS-232 Cable

IRBUS (RS-485) Network for Base Control Modules and Universal Communication Modules, Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (3 Wires)

IRBUS Address: 1 Service Tool Plug on Panel Door

Universal Communication Module (UCM)

Base Control Module (BCM)

IRBUS Address: 4

IRBUS Address: 2

Serial Port (COM1) INGERSOLL-RAND CEM for Windows RS-232 Cable

IRBUS Address: 5

Universal Comm. Module (UCM)

Next CMC Panel(s) for use in CEM for Windows RS-232 to RS-422/RS-485 Converter

Modbus Network #1 Full or Half Duplex RS-422 or RS-485

IRBUS Address: 6

Universal Comm. Module (UCM)

To DH+ Network Allen-Bradley 1770-KF2 Interface Module

DF1 Network Full Duplex RS-422A

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

136 1770-KF2 Setup

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

A 1770-KF2 module links asynchronous devices (RS-422A or RS-232C) to an Allen-Bradley Data Highway or Data Highway Plus network. The 1770-KF2 module has 8 switch assemblies that let you select various communication options. The switch assemblies are shown in the diagram below:
Switch Assembly SW-1 SW-2, SW-3, SW-4 SW-5 SW-6 SW-7 SW-8 Communication Option Asynchronous link features Node number Network link communication rate Asynchronous link communication rate DH/DH+ network link section RS-232C/RS-422A selection

CAUTION

The 1770-KF2 module reads the status of these communication option switches only at power up, so you need to change switch settings with 1770-KF2 powered off.

SW-1 (Asynchronous Link Features)


The following table shows the different combinations available for setting the asynchronous link with the 5 dipswitches of SW-1.
SW-1 Settings 3 (Duplicate 4 Message) (Hand ON: ignore Shake) OFF: accept OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Protocol

Error Check

Parity

Embedded Response

Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex

BCC BCC BCC BCC CRC

None Even None Even None

No No Yes Yes Yes

OFF ON OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

CAUTION

Only the UCM-DF1 driver supports the full duplex options. Half duplex is not supported.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


SW-2, SW-3, SW-4 (Node Address)
These three switch assemblies are used to set the network node number of the 1770-KF2 module. Set both switches in SW-2 OFF for DH+ link because the node number should be a 2-digit octal number that identifies the 1770-KF2 as a unique node on DH+. Valid node numbers for 1770-KF2 in DH+ network are 00 to 77 octal. First digit (SW-2) should always be set to zero.
SW-2 Setting 1 2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON Digit 0 1 2 3

137

Second and third digits:


1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW-3, SW-4 Setting 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SW-5 (Network Link Communication Rate)


Switch assembly SW-5 lets you select the communication rate for the 1770-KF2 modules network link (DH+). Set both switches ON for a network communication rate of 57,600 bits per second. Be sure to set all modules on the same DH+ network for this communication rate.

SW-6 (Asynchronous Link Communication Rate and Diagnostic Commands)


Switches #1, #2, #3 of SW-6 let you select the communication rate for the 1770-KF2 modules asynchronous port. Meanwhile, switch #4 determines how 1770-KF2 module treats diagnostic commands sent by a remote DH+ node. It is recommended to set at 9600 baud or higher, and execute received diagnostic commands.
SW-6 Setting 4 ON OFF

Execute received diagnostic commands Pass any received diagnostic commands to the attached asynchronous device

The available baud rate settings are shown below:


Baud Rate (Bits per second) 110 300 600 1 OFF ON OFF SW-6 Setting 2 OFF OFF ON 3 OFF OFF OFF

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

138
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 ON OFF ON OFF ON

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON

SW-7 (Network Link Selection)


UCM only supports DH+ network. SW-7 should always select DH+.
Network Mode DH DH+ SW-7 Setting 1 2 OFF OFF ON OFF

SW-8 (RS-232C/RS-422A Selection)


The UCM-DF1 interface uses RS-422 communication. SW-8 should select RS422.
Communicatio n Type RS-232C RS-422A SW-8 Setting 1 OFF ON 2 ON OFF

Wiring Diagram for RS-422A


1770 KF2 Module RS-422 1 14 25 16 18 4 5 6 8 20 GND TX+ TXRX+ RXCable not to exceed 4000 feet UCM RS-422 RX+ RXTX+ TX-

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

139

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

140

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Documentation
An Electrical Schematic drawing is provided as standard after order placement. Control Panel Outline drawings are optional. Logic diagrams are considered proprietary and are not available.

System Information
Status Codes
The following table lists the status codes for the Base Control Module (BCM) only. These codes indicate every operating condition, both normal and abnormal, for the system. A code always exists for the system; for example, Status 05h indicates that the system is running properly. These codes, except Status 00h and 05h, are shown on a blank screen in the upper left hand corner of the Operator User Interface (OUI). Since Status 00h and 05h are normal operating conditions, these codes are not displayed. When a code is displayed, contact your local Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative.
Status Code 00h 01h Definition Booting Stay In Boot Comments The BCM is in the boot process. This is a normal process during BCM power up. This state will not be displayed. The BCM is held in boot mode by the hardware configuration. This condition exists only when the boot jumper (hardware device) is plugged into the display (OUI) port. This hardware jumper is only required when doing system level reprogramming of the module. The BCM software is not valid. This condition occurs when the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) calculated by the module does not equal the CRC value written to the module when programmed. This would typically occur when the programming process is aborted (halted). The module must be reprogrammed. The BCM is currently in the process of being programmed. If this message does not disappear after programming is completed, power cycle the unit. The BCM software has failed to operate properly. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. Normal operating condition. This state will not be displayed. Operating system error. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. Operating system error. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. The BCM application software and tables are not compatible. The module must be reprogrammed. Analog input system error. A hardware malfunction has occurred. Analog output system error. A hardware malfunction has occurred. Digital input and output system error. A hardware malfunction has occurred. Ladder logic processing system or loop task error. The module must be reprogrammed. Comparator system error. The module must be reprogrammed. Operator User Interface system error. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. Data logging system error. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition

02h

ROM CRC Failed

03h 04h

Commanded To Boot Invalid Application

05h 06h

Application Running Fatal Exit

07h

System Error

08h 09h 0Ah 0Bh 0Ch 0Dh 0Eh

Incompatible Software Versions A-D System Error D-A System Error Digital I/O System Error Logic Engine System or Loop Task Error Comparator System Error Operator User Interface Error Data Logging System Error

0Fh

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


reoccurs. Power supply voltage (+24 VDC) dropped below minimum operating level. Check power supply. Cycle power when voltage is within proper operating limits. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs.

141

10h

Low Power

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

142

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Status Code 11h

Definition Task Overrun

12h

Watchdog Failure

13h 14h 15h 16h

Intermodule Data Error Calculation Block Error Interpolation System Error Calibration System Error

Comments System processing capabilities do not meet requirements for operation. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. The internal backup system monitor is not operational. BCM hardware should be replaced. Cycling the power on the module will restart the system. Once restarted, the program will operate properly until the same condition reoccurs. An error has occurred while generating a message to be sent from one BCM to the other BCM in a multi-module configuration. The module must be reprogrammed. A stack underflow or overflow has occurred in a calculation block. The module must be reprogrammed. An error has occurred in the interpolation block. The module must be reprogrammed. Occurs during initialization of the EEPROM block. The module must be reprogrammed.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

143

Base Control Module (BCM)


Module Layout
J15-Digital Outputs, Channels 4-1 J14-Digital Outputs, Channels 8-5 J13-Digital Outputs, Channels 12-9 J12-Digital Outputs, Channels 16-13
Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1

J10-Power Input (24 VDC)


Pin 1

F102-Fuse for AnalogI/O (J1, J2 and J3) F103-Fuse for Digital Inputs (J4 and J5)

F101-Fuse for Operator User Interface (Display) F100-Fuse for Base Module CPU Card

J9-Current Transformer Input (0-5 Amps) J8-Speed Sensor Input (1-150 Hz)
Pin 1

J7-RS485 Serial Data Link (IRBUS)


Pin 1

All Fuses are 5x20mm, GMA 1.5 amp, Fast Blow

J6-RS232 Serial Data Link (Display), Female DB9

Tadiran TL-5101, 3.6V 1/2 AA Battery

J5-Digital (Discrete) Inputs (24 VDC), Channels 9-16


Pin 1

J4-Digital (Discrete) Inputs (24 VDC), Channels 1-8


Pin 1

J3-Analog Outputs (4-20mA) Channels 1-4


Pin 7 Pin 1 Pin 5 Pin 1

Pin 25 Pin 1

J1-Grounded Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 3-23

J2-Floating Analog Inputs, (4-20mA) Channels 1-2

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

144

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Connector Description
Tag J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J12 J13 J14 J15 Type Grounded Analog Inputs, 4-20 mA Floating Analog Inputs, 4-20 mA Analog Outputs, 4-20 mA Digital (Discrete) Inputs, 24 VDC RS232 Serial Data Link (Operator User Interface) RS485 (IRBUS) Serial Data Link Speed Sensor Input, Variable Reluctance Current Transformer Input Power Digital Outputs Channel 3-23 1-2 1-4 1-8 9-16 na na Module Connector (12) Phoenix MDSTB 2, 5/2-G-5, 08 (2) Phoenix MDSTB 2, 5/2-G-5, 08 (3) Phoenix MDSTB 2, 5/2-G-5, 08 Phoenix MSTBA 2, 5/10-G-5, 08 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Female) Phoenix MSTBA 2, 5/6-G-5, 08 Phoenix MSTBA 2, 5/3-G-5, 08 Terminal Strip Phoenix MSTBA2, 5/5-G-5, 08 (4) Phoenix MSTBA 2, 5/8-G-5, 08 Mating Connector (2) Phoenix MDST 2, 5/24-3T-5, 08 (2) Phoenix MDST 2, 5/4-3T-5, 08 (2) Phoenix MDST 2, 5/6-3T-5, 08 Phoenix MSTB 2, 5/10-ST-5, 08 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Male) Phoenix MSTB 2, 5/5-ST-5, 08 Phoenix MSTB 2, 5/3-ST-5, 08 Wire Lugs Phoenix MSTB 2, 5/5-ST-5, 08 (4) Phoenix MSTB 2, 5/8-ST-5, 08

na na 13-16 9-12 5-8 1-4

NOTES: 1. BCM Weight: 1775 177g [3.92 .39 lb.] 2. BCM Size: Length=355.6 mm [14.0 in] x Width=247 mm [9.7 in] x Depth=45 mm [1.8 in] 3. To ensure chassis ground, install 12-gauge ground strap between this module and the NEMA enclosure. Place external tooth lock washer between this module and the ground strap. 4. na is defined as not applicable. 5. All Phoenix connectors may be replaced with an equal supplier.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Connector Input and Output (I/O)
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1-Grounded Analog Inputs Analog Input Channel 3 Power 24 VDC, Channels 3 & 4 Shield, Channels 3 & 4 Analog Input Channel 4 Analog Input Channel 5 Power 24 VDC, Channels 5 & 6 Shield, Channels 5 & 6 Analog Input Channel 6 Analog Input Channel 7 Power 24 VDC, Channels 7 & 8 Shield, Channels 7 & 8 Analog Input Channel 8 Analog Input Channel 9 Power 24 VDC, Channels 9 & 10 Shield, Channels 9 & 10 Analog Input Channel 10 Analog Input Channel 11 Power 24 VDC, Channels 11 & 12 Shield, Channels 11 & 12 Analog Input Channel 12 Analog Input Channel 13 Power 24 VDC, Channels 13 & 14 Shield, Channels 13 & 14 Analog Input Channel 14 Analog Input Channel 15 Power 24 VDC, Channels 15 & 16 Shield, Channels 15 & 16 Analog Input Channel 16 Analog Input Channel 17 Power 24 VDC, Channels 17 & 18 Shield, Channels 17 & 18 Analog Input Channel 18 Analog Input Channel 19 Power 24 VDC, Channels 19 & 20 Shield, Channels 19 & 20 Analog Input Channel 20 Analog Input Channel 21 Power 24 VDC, Channels 21 & 22 Shield, Channels 21 & 22 Analog Input Channel 22 Analog Input Channel 23 Power 24 VDC, Channel 23 Shield, Channel 23 Spare Spare Power 24 VDC, Spare Shield, Spare Spare Pin J2-Floating Analog Inputs Analog Input Channel 1+ Power 24 VDC, Channel 1 Analog Input Channel 1Shield, Channel 1 Analog Input Channel 2+ Power 24 VDC, Channel 2 Analog Input Channel 2Shield, Channel 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 J7-RS485 (IRBUS) Data Link 1+ Data Link 1Data Link Ground Data Link 1+ Data Link 1Data Link Ground Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J6-RS232 (Display) Not Used Receive Data (RxD) Transmit Data (TxD) Not Used Signal Ground Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J15-Digital Outputs Digital Output Channel 4 Digital Output Channel 4 Digital Output Channel 3 Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Output Output Output Output Output Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel 3 2 2 1 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J5-Digital Inputs Power 24 VDC, Channels 9-16 Digital Input Channel 9 Digital Input Channel 10 Digital Input Channel 11 Digital Input Channel 12 Digital Input Channel 13 Digital Input Channel 14 Digital Input Channel 15 Digital Input Channel 16 Ground, Channels 9-16 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J14-Digital Outputs Digital Output Channel 8 Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J13-Digital Outputs Digital Output Channel 12 Digital Output Channel 12 Digital Output Channel 11 Digital Output Channel 11 Digital Output Channel 10 Digital Output Channel 10 Digital Output Channel 9 Digital Output Channel 9 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J4-Digital Inputs Power 24 VDC, Channels 1-8 Digital Input Channel 1 Digital Input Channel 2 Digital Input Channel 3 Digital Input Channel 4 Digital Input Channel 5 Digital Input Channel 6 Digital Input Channel 7 Digital Input Channel 8 Ground, Channels 1-8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J12-Digital Outputs Digital Output Channel 16 Digital Output Channel 16 Digital Output Channel 15 Digital Output Channel 15 Digital Output Channel 14 Digital Output Channel 14 Digital Output Channel 13 Digital Output Channel 13 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J3-Analog Outputs Analog Output Channel 1+ Power 24 VDC, Channels 1 & 2 Analog Output Channel 1Analog Output Channel 2+ Shields, Channels 1 & 2 Analog Output Channel 2Analog Output Channel 3+ Power 24 VDC, Channels 3 & 4 Analog Output Channel 3Analog Output Channel 4+ Shields, Channels 3 & 4 Analog Output Channel 4Pin 1 2 3 4 5 J10-Power Power +24V DC Power Ground Chassis Ground Display Power +24VDC Display Power Ground Pin 1 2 J9-Current Transformer CT+ CTPin 1 2 3 J8-Speed Sensor SS+ SSSS Ground

145

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

146

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Operator User Interface Module (OUI)


Module Layout
Side View
J1-RS232 Port
Pin 1

J2-Input Power
Pin 1

Connector Description
Tag J1 J2 RS232 Port Input Power Type Module Connector 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Female) Phoenix MSTBA2, 5/2-G-5, 08 Mating Connector 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Male) Phoenix MSTW2, 5/2-ST-5, 08

NOTES: 1. OUI Weight: 410 g [0.90 lb.] 2. OUI Size: Length=267 mm [10.5 in] x Width=175 mm [6.9 in] x Depth=60 mm [2.4 in] 3. All Phoenix connectors may be replaced with an equal supplier.

Connector Input and Output (I/O)


Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1-RS232 Port No Connection Transmit (TX) Receive (RX) No Connection Signal Common No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Pin 1 2 J2-Input Power +12 To +24 VDC (VPOWER) Ground (GND)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


CMC User Interface/Bezel Cleaning Instructions
The following procedure is recommended to clean the CMC User Interface vinyl overlay material and/or the User Interface bezel.

147

1. Stop the compressor and depress the maintained Emergency Stop push-button, this will prevent an inadvertent start up or trip of the compressor during the cleaning process. 2. Dampen a soft cloth or paper towel with water and wipe any dust, dirt or liquids from the surface of the User Interface, do not use an abrasive pad or brush to clean the surface of the User Interface vinyl overlay or bezel. 3. If more aggressive measures are required to clean the User Interface and/or bezel surface use a mild non-abrasive household cleaner (such as Formula 409, Fantastik, etc.) sprayed or wiped directly onto the surface to be cleaned. Dampen a soft cloth or paper towel with water and wipe any remaining cleaner from the surfaces. Ingersoll-Rand Company recommends the following for cleaning the OUI and bezel: Cleaners: Water or mild house hold cleaner, no petroleum or acetone based fluids. Cleaning wipes: Soft cotton clothe or paper towels.

Backlight Replacement Procedure


Tools Needed: 1. Flat blade screwdriver with a small tip (1/8 inch) 2. Number 1 Phillips Screwdriver 3. Electrostatic Discharge Strap Connected to Earth Ground

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

148

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Step 1

Step 2

J1

User Terminal

Remove cabling Lift cover to remove


J2 Display Power

Unplug connector and remove nylon cable retainer screws

Loo sen scre ws, slid e rig ht

+ -

Step 3
Remove screws from the lower printed circuit board, then use a screwdriver to gently pry the backlight panel loose.

Step 4

Use circular stand-offs to rest screwdriver shaft against while prying backlight panel out.

The backlight is part of a larger panel that is removed as an assembly.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

149

Step 5
Backlight panel is inserted into display between the circuit board and the LCD glass with the white plastic backing sheet and wires facing toward the circuit boards.

Step 6
Insert screws being careful not to over tighten.

Slide the backlight panel in place and align the screw holes so the screws may be inserted and tightened.

Route wiring, replace nylon cable retainers, insert backlight plug, replace main cover and connect power and communication cable to complete installation.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

150

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Universal Communication Module (UCM) Optional


Module Layout
Side View
J2-Service/Modem (RS232) Port J1-Microcontroller/Network (RS422/RS485) Port J3-Input Power

Pin 1

Pin 1

Pin 1

Top View

Switch A0 IRBUS Address Switch A1 Unused Switch (Must be set to 0)

RS232 Activity Indicator

IRBUS RS485 Activity Indicator RS422/485 Activity Indicator

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

151

Connector Description
Tag J1 J2 J3 Type Microcontroller/Network (RS422/485) Port Service/Modem (RS232) Port Input Power Module Connector Phoenix MSTBA2, 5/8-G-5, 08 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Female) Phoenix MSTBA2, 5/2-G-5, 08 Mating Connector Phoenix MSTBW2, 5/24-ST-5, 08 9 Position D Sub Miniature (Male) Phoenix MSTW2, 5/2-ST-5, 08

NOTES: 1. UCM Weight: 410 g [0.90 lb.] 2. UCM Size: Length=136 mm [5.4 in] x Width=143 mm [5.6 in] x Depth=31 mm [1.2 in] 3. All Phoenix connectors may be replaced with an equal supplier.

Connector Input and Output (I/O)


Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1-Microcontroller/Network Port IRBUS RS485 Datalink + (DL+) IRBUS RS485 Datalink - (DL-) Ground (GND) RS422/485 Transmit + (TX+) RS422/485 Transmit - (TX-) RS422/485 Receive + (RX+) RS422/485 Receive - (RX-) Ground (GND) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J2-Service/Modem Port No Connection Transmit (TX) Receive (RX) No Connection Signal Common No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Pin 1 2 J3-Input Power +12 To +24 VDC (VPOWER) Ground (GND)

Setting UCM Switches


The UCM has two sixteen position selector switches, A0 and A1. Switch A0 is used for setting the IRBUS Address for the UCM. This switch can be in any of the sixteen positions. If there are multiple UCMs on a single Base Control Module, then each address for each UCM must be unique. This applies only to multiple UCMs on a single Base Control Module. Switch A1 is unused at this time and must be set to zero.

UCM Port Activity LEDs


The UCM has three light emitting diodes (LEDs) to indicate the activity of the RS232, RS422/485 and the IRBUS RS485 ports. The following table indicates the different states of these ports.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

152

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

RS232 off on on on blinking blinking on on

RS422 RS485 off off on on on on blinking blinking

IRBUS RS485 off off on blinking blinking on blinking on

blinking

blinking

blinking

UCM State No power (24 VDC) Boot mode, check A1 switch for being non-zero (cycle power to exit boot mode) Running, but no communication on any port Multi-module job with inter-module communication Service Tool in use Service Tool in use, but no response from BCM check connection between BCM and UCM MODBUS communication in use RS-422 port in use, but no response from BCM check connection between BCM and UCM or Modbus and DF1 address All blinking together imply a continuous reboot or application problem

UCM Communications Parameters


The UCM has three communication ports, RS232, RS422/485 and IRBUS RS485. Each of these ports has its own communication parameters that it supports.

Modbus/DF1 IRBUS RS-422/485 RS-485 4000 feet (1218.3 Meters) 100 feet (30.4 Meters) 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 9600 9600, 19200, 38400 Parity None None, Even, Odd None Data Bits 8 8 8 Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2 1 Configurable No Yes* No * A certified Ingersoll-Rand Service Representative will provide this configuration. Parameter Distance Baud Rate

Service Tool RS-232 50 feet (15.2 meters) 9600

UCM Timeout
The UCM has three communication ports, RS232, RS422/485 and IRBUS RS485. Each of these ports has its own communication parameters that it supports.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


RS422/485 Network Wiring Diagram - Full Duplex
Modbus Master Compressor Panel #n
Modbus Address - nn IRBUS Address - any

153

B The maximum distance of a MODBUS Network is 4000 electrical feet; i.e., the length of the wire from the RS-232 to RS-422 Converter (Location A) to the last compressor's Universal Communication Module (Location B). The maximum number of devices (nodes) on a MODBUS Network is 30. (For CEM for Windows and a CMC only system, the maximum is 16). A terminating resistor is not required at the end of the network.

Compressor Panel #6
From Computer Serial Port RS-232 RS-232 DB-25 Modbus Address - 05 IRBUS Address - any Modbus Address - 06 IRBUS Address - any

120 VAC

Compressor Panel #5

ICC-11 RS-232C to RS-422 Interface Converter SW1 - DCE SW2 - Simulation Mode SW3 - Position 2, Tx and Rx is always on
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-

Compressor Panel #4
Modbus Address - 04 IRBUS Address - any

RS-422 2 Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (5 Wires)

Compressor Panel #3
Modbus Address - 03 IRBUS Address - any

RS-422 2 Twisted Pair Wires (4 Wires)

A
120 VAC

NOTE: Ground wire should be connected to one ground location only.

To Power Supply

To BCM

24+ Gnd Power

DL+ DL- Gnd Tx+ Tx- Rx+ Rx- Gnd RS-485 RS-422/485

RS-232 DB-9

RS-422 2 Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (5 Wires)

To Power Supply

To BCM

24+ Gnd Power

DL+ DL- Gnd Tx+ Tx- Rx+ Rx- Gnd RS-485 RS-422/485

RS-232 DB-9

Universal Communication Module (UCM)


IMPORTANT: Because this is the first slave node in the Modbus network, the transmit and receive lines of this node are crossed with the transmit and receive lines of the Modbus Master. When daisychaining to the next slave node, do not cross the transmit and receive lines. IRBUS Address Set switch A0: 0-F Set switch A1: 0 A0 A1 Modbus Address - 01 (Set through software)

Universal Communication Module (UCM )

IRBUS Address Set switch A0: 0-F Set switch A1: 0 A0 A1 Modbus Address - 02 (Set through software)

Compressor Panel #1

Compressor Panel #2

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

154 RS422 Network Wiring Diagram - Half Duplex

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Modbus Master

Compressor Panel #n
Modbus Address - nn IRBUS Address - any

B The maximum distance of a MODBUS Network is 4000 electrical feet; i.e., the length of the wire from the RS-232 to RS-422 Converter (Location A) to the last compressor's Universal Communication Module (Location B). The maximum number of devices (nodes) on a MODBUS Network is 30. (For CEM for Windows and a CMC only system, the maximum is 16). A terminating resistor is not required at the end of the network.

Compressor Panel #6
From Computer Serial Port RS-232 Modbus Address - 06 IRBUS Address - any

120 VAC

Compressor Panel #5
Modbus Address - 05 IRBUS Address - any

RS-232 DB-25

ICC-11 RS-232C to RS-422 Interface Converter SW1 - DCE SW2 - Simulation Mode SW3 - Position 1, Tx enabled when RTS ON, RX enabled when RTS Off
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-

Compressor Panel #4
Modbus Address - 04 IRBUS Address - any

RS-422 Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (3 Wires)

Compressor Panel #3
Modbus Address - 03 IRBUS Address - any

RS-422 Twisted Pair Wires (2 Wires)

A
120 VAC

NOTE: Ground wire should be connected at one ground location only.

To Power Supply

To BCM

24+ Gnd Power

DL+ DL- Gnd Tx+ Tx- Rx+ Rx- Gnd RS-485 RS-422/485

RS-232 DB-9

RS-422 Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (3 Wires)

To Power Supply

To BCM

24+ Gnd Power

DL+ DL- Gnd Tx+ Tx- Rx+ Rx- Gnd RS-485 RS-422/485

RS-232 DB-9

Universal Communication Module (UCM)


IMPORTANT: Because this is the first slave node in the Modbus network, the transmit and receive lines of this node are crossed with the transmit and receive lines of the Modbus Master. IRBUS Address Set switch A0: 0-F Set switch A1: 0 A0 Modbus Address - 01 (Set through software) A1 Modbus Address - 02 (Set through software)

Universal Communication Module (UCM )


IRBUS Address Set switch A0: 0-F Set switch A1: 0 A0 A1

Compressor Panel #1

Compressor Panel #2

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Terminating Resistor

155

The RS422/485 circuitry built into each UCM supports Alternate-Fail-safe AC Termination. This termination circuitry enhances the UCM's ability to operation in harsher (electrically noisier) environments. Since this circuitry is built into the product, no external terminating resistor is required. For a thorough discussion of the various termination techniques, please refer to "A Comparison of Differential Termination Techniques", National Semiconductor Application Note 903 (AN-903), August 1993. This application note can be obtained from the Internet at "www.national.com".

Typical System Layout

Operator User Interface (OUI)


CENTAC Microcontroller

24 VDC Power

RS232 Base Control Module (BCM) #1

24 VDC 120/240 VAC Power

IRBUS (RS485)

IRBUS (RS485)

Universal Communications Module (UCM)

Base Control Module (BCM) #2 24 VDC

Power Supply

24 VDC Optional Equipment

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

156 Network Diagram

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

CMC Panel
CENTAC Microcontroller

Serial Port (COM1)

INGERSOLL-RAND Service Tool Base Control Module (BCM)

RS-232 Cable

IRBUS (RS-485) Network for Base Control Modules and Universal Communication Modules, Twisted Pair Wires with Ground (3 Wires)

IRBUS Address: 1 Service Tool Plug on Panel Door Universal Communication Module (UCM) Base Control Module (BCM)

IRBUS Address: 4

IRBUS Address: 2

Serial Port (COM1) INGERSOLL-RAND CEM for Windows RS-232 Cable

IRBUS Address: 5

Universal Comm. Module (UCM)

Next CMC Panel(s) for use in CEM for Windows RS-232 to RS-422/RS-485 Converter

Modbus Network #1 Full or Half Duplex RS-422 or RS-485

IRBUS Address: 6

Universal Comm. Module (UCM)

Modbus Network #2 Full or Half Duplex RS-422 or RS-485

To next CMC Panel or any other Modbus compliant product

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

157

Technical Specification
DESCRIPTION OF STANDARD
Switches, Lights and Push Buttons
Control Power On/Off switch... activates panel power and prelube pump Compressor trouble light (red) Emergency stop pushbutton

Copper Ground Bar

PHYSICAL DATA
Panel Construction
NEMA 12 enclosure Formed and welded 11 gauge carbon steel cabinet, 14 gauge door Door gasket with butt type hinges Back panel for component mounting

Microprocessor OUI
240x128 pixel LCD graphic display window Tabbed folders for ease of navigation Status Bar with compressor state Fifteen screens of compressor information and setup data Left/Right/Up/Down/Return push buttons Acknowledge/Reset push buttons Start/Stop push buttons Load/Unload push buttons Contrast Button

Dimensions
Panel 1 Panel 2 Height 54 in (137.2 cm) 54 in (137.2 cm) Width 32 in (81.3 cm) 35 in (88.9 cm) Depth 12 in (30.5 cm) 14 in (35.6 cm) 1 - No Starter or size 5 starter panels 2 - with size 5DP or size 6 starter panels Controller Board 12.5 in (31.8 cm) 18.5 in (47.0 cm) 1.5 in (3.8 cm)

Event Log
Most recent 224 events with name, time, date and value Logged events Alarms Trips Command key press (local and remote) E-Stop pressed Module control power up and down MinLoad reset Analog input failed Setpoint change (local and remote) Automatic start and stop (when Auto Hot Start purchased) Surge Unload Compressor Started Driver Failed to Start

Weight
Without starter 300 lb. (136.1 kg) With size 5 starter 350 lb. (158.8 kg) With size 6 starter 375 lb. (170.1 kg)

Component Data
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) approved components

Control Wiring
High voltage and low voltage wiring segregation TEW wire with PVC insulation (meets NEMA VM-1 for Flame Retardance) 105 degC temperature rise on insulation 600 V rating, 18 gauge for instrumentation and signal, 16 gauge for control Heat shrink wire markers for harness Clip-on wire markers internal to panel Wire Ferules

Language and Units of Measure


Language and Units of Measure Sets Two Language and Units of Measure sets are select-able from the display. NOTE: The English language and psia, degF, mils are standard for all units. Spanish and kPA, degC, microns are the default alternate language unless otherwise specified. Other Units of Measure are available upon request. Languages Arabic Bulgarian Chinese Croatian Czech Danish Dutch French Finnish German Greek Hungarian Italian Norwegian Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Slovakian Slovenian Spanish Swedish Turkish Units of Measure Available upon request.

Terminal Blocks
300 VAC design for #22 through #10 wire size Tubular clamp contacts and tang clamping collar, DIN Rail mounted

Push Buttons/Selector Switches/Indicating Lights


Corrosion resistant, Oil-tight Designed and manufactured to NEMA 4/12/13 Pilot lights are 120 VAC full voltage type

Control Interposing Relays


300 VAC rating at 10 amp continuous 60 amp make, 6 amp break at 120 VAC 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz coil, 4 normally open poles, DIN rail mounted

Control Functions
Modulate or Autodual Manual Valve control for compressor setup High motor load limit(controls maximum opening of inlet valve) MinLoad (controls minimum opening of inlet valve) Partial Unload on Surge Moves inlet valve to minimum load setting and bumps the bypass valve open to exit the surge condition Minimizes duration and magnitude of pressure drop from surge Surge Indexing

Contacts
Normally Open, 5 amps at 120 VAC

Pressure Transducers
Ranges 0-50 PSIG, 0-200 PSIG, 0-500 PSIG, 4-20 mA Output Channel 1/4" NPT pressure port fitting 1/2" Conduit connection head fitting for machine mounted model

Temperature Transducers
0-500 degF operating range, 4-20 mA transmitter 100 ohm platinum, TCR=0.00385 Four compression type terminals NEMA 4 rating

Actual/Alarm/Trip Functions
Low oil pressure High/low oil temperature High air temperature into last compression stage High stage shaft vibrations, single plane

Vibration Transmitters
Eddy current probe Vibration range 0-4 mils, Frequency range 5-3000 Hz Output Channel 4-20 mA and 100 mV/Mil, Supply voltage 18-50 VDC Barrier type screw terminals, DIN rail mountable Hardened against 150 MHz and 440 MHz radio interference

Alarm Function
Surge

Trip Function
Low seal air (interlocked w/ prelube pump operation)

Wiring Harness
One wiring harness per device NEMA 4 rated

Display Functions (Read Only)


Motor current System air pressure

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

158

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Power Regulating Transformer
120 VAC, 60 Hz, 250 VA -65% Input Channel line variation, Output Channel +5-10% NEMA Specification 15% Input Channel line variation, Output Channel 3%

OPTIONS
Analog Inputs (Monitor, Alarm and Trip)
Any Temperature Any Pressure Any Vibration Any 4-20 mA signal

Automatic Starting
Automatic Hot Start REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED Selector Switch Solenoid Valves for Intercoolers CMC settable start up pressure setpoint Post Run Water Flow Timer Automatic Cold Start CONTROL POWER LOCAL/OFF/ COLD Selector Switch Strobe Light Solenoid Valves for Intercoolers and Instrument Air Line CMC settable start up pressure setpoint Post Run Water Flow Timer Start Timer Lube Oil Alarm Bypass Timer

Digital (Discrete) Inputs (Monitor and Alarm or Trip)


Low water flow Dirty inlet filter (switch supplied loose) Dirty oil filter Low oil level High condensate level (common for all traps) High motor temperature Any Discrete Input

Panel Enclosures
Cooing Fan with Filter 110/115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.24 Amps, 20 Watts Air flow with filter 36 CFM (61 M3/Hr) NEMA 4 Enclosure Space Heater, Vortex Tube Cooler NEMA 4X Enclosure Space Heater, Vortex Tube Cooler Stainless steel or epoxy coated carbon steel Space Heater 120 VAC, 120 Watts, finned strip heater Bimetallic baseboard type thermostat set at 45 degF (7 degC) Vortex Tube Cooler 25 SCFM (42 NM3/Hr) at 100 PSIG (7 BarG) of compressed air 1500 BTU/Hr (378 kCal/Hr), Thermostat set at 90 degF (32 degC) Solenoid operated valve, Air Filter Type Z Purge Select-able quick and normal flow rates with meters Differential pressure switch set at 0.2 inches (5 mm) of water Loss of purge indication, Relief valve, Warning label Fused Control Power Disconnect Rotary handle through door, 30 amp fuse Ground Fault Protector for UL Panels 120 Vac circuits protected against ground fault currents.

COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
Communications Card(s)
Up to three cards per module RS-422/485 Local/Network Selector Switch

Direct CMC Communication with RS422/RS-485


Requires programming application by customer Utilizes standard MODBUS protocol or Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol for PLC2, PLC5 and SLC500 devices

Hard Wired Communication


REMOTE FUNCTIONS DISABLED/ENABLED Selector Switch Contacts for Remote Start/Stop, Load/Unload, Acknowledge/Reset Trouble Indication Contacts (Alarm and Trip, Alarm Only or Trip Only) Remote 4-20 for Pressure Setpoint Running Unloaded Contact

Centac Energy Master (CEM)


Features Sequencing, load sharing and data logging for eight (8) compressors A CMC Communication Adapter mounted in each CMC panel Max distance from last compressor to CMC Communication Adapter is 4000 feet (1218 meters) RS-232 to RS-422 Converter CEM Personal Computer Intel Pentium processor, 32 MBytes RAM, CD ROM Drive, 3.5 inch diskette drive, Program size approximately 30 MByte; however, hard disk should be sized for data logging (recommend 100 MBytes), Windows 95 or NT (NT Preferred), Color monitor, Printer (Optional)

Control Electrical Package (Standard on CV)


Prelube Pump Motor Starter Two horsepower and less Available voltages 380, 460, 575 VAC Maximum voltage rating 600 VAC, 10 Amp rating, 120 VAC coils IEC Style Heater Contactor IEC Style, Adjustable ambient compensated overloads Available voltages 380, 460, 575 VAC Maximum voltage rating 600 VAC, 10 Amp rating, 120 VAC coils Control Power Transformer Machine tool type, 230, 460, 575 VAC to 120/95 VAC 500 VA or optional 1000 and 1500 VA, 50 or 60 Hz Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor UL 1449 Listed Tested to ANSI / IEEE C62.41 category A and B environments.

CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES
Three phase power Clean, dry control air 80-150 PSIG (5.62-10.55 kg/cm2) Control air tubing from control air header, 1/4 in (0.635 cm) FNPT connection Mount and wire external switches and field wired devices Tuning control parameters for system Current transformer instrument grade 0-5 amp Better than 1% accuracy

Stage Data Package (Standard on CV)


Interstage Air Pressure and Temperature each stage

Alarm Horn
80-95 dBA, 2900 Hz

Running Unloaded Shutdown Timer


Timing range and mode select-able through CMC

CONTROLLER OPERATING ENVIRONMENT


Electrical Operation
115 VAC 5% 24 VDC Instruments except three wire RTDs 32 VA of AC power requirement 50/60 Hz AC supply frequency

Water Solenoid Post Run Timer


Timing range and mode select-able through CMC

Inlet Valve Tight Closure


Keeps inlet valve closed until motor reaches full speed 0-30 second timer range settable by IR Service Tech

Temperatures
Operating temperature 32 to 140 degF (0 to 60 degC) Storage temperature -4 to 158 degF (-20 to 70 degC)

Diesel Engine Driven Compressor Control Steam and Gas Turbine Driven Compressor Control Main Motor Starter (Wye-Delta)
NEMA Size 5 or 6 Open transition type, Ambient compensated overloads Available voltages 380, 460, 575 VAC, 120 VAC coils

Relative Humidity
95% (maximum) non-condensing

DOCUMENTATION
Instruction book Electrical schematic Panel Outline drawing (Optional)

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

1
Auto-Dual The control mode that automatically unloads a modulating compressor when the bypass valve position reaches a specified value or the check valve closes. Once unloaded, this control mode will automatically reload the compressor when the system pressure drops below a specified value. Auto-Dual Unload Timer The time delay, in seconds, at which the machine will be unloaded after the bypass valve has passed and stayed below the unload point when Autodual is active. Auto-Hot Start A control mode that automatically starts and loads the compressor on a low-pressure condition. Auto-Reload The portion of Auto-Dual control mode that automatically reloads the compressor when the pressure drops below a specified value. Auto-Start Pressure The system pressure, in pressure setpoint units, at which the machine will start when either auto hot or cold start is active. Axial Position The position of the rotating assembly with respect to the horizontal axis of the pinion. Baud Rate Unit of signaling speed for data communications. The speed in baud is the number of line changes (in frequency, amplitude, etc.) or events per second. At low speeds each event represents only one bit and baud rate equals bits per second. As speed increases, each event represents more than one bit, and baud rate does not truly equal bits per second. BCM Base Control Module. The device of the CMC that receives all of the compressor inputs and outputs and makes decisions about how the compressor is to operate. Binary Signal The type of signal used in communications. Binary refers to the smallest size of data being transmitted, a bit. Blow-off Valve Also know as a bypass valve or antisurge valve. This valve protects the compressor from surge by bypassing a percentage of the compressed air to the atmosphere, which results in keeping the compressor loaded above the surge point. BPS Bits per second. Unit of signaling speed for data communications. Bypass Valve See blow-off valve. CE Mark The CE Mark is a combination of various individual European standards into one set of standards for the entire European community. The Mark is a self declaration and self marking process. Once you have proven that the particular equipment meets the requirements of CE Mark and have the data to back it up, you may mark the product with the CE Mark. Citect One of many SCADA software packages that can be used for air system integration.

Glossary
The following glossary is generic; therefore, some terms do not apply to all CMC systems.
AB See Allen-Bradley. Absolute Address For Modbus compliant devices, the specific memory location for a coil, discrete input, register or analog input. The address is a five-digit number. Accelerometer An instrument used to measure acceleration. These instruments are typically used for bearing analysis. Actuator The device on a control valve that provides the power to move the valve to a position. Typically, this power is supplied through control air to open (for the inlet valve) and close (for the bypass valve). For fail-safe operation, a spring is used to drive the valve in the opposite direction. Address This term is used by PLC manufacturers to indicate a specific memory location within the unit. These locations typically reference the value for data items like analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs, digital outputs, coils and intermediate computational states. Through these memory locations, the current system pressure, first stage vibration and discharge air temperature can be determined. Alarm The term used to indicate that an abnormal condition exists that should be addressed by an operator. This condition has not reached a level that would shut down the compressor. Alert See Alarm. Allen-Bradley A manufacturer of control products, most notably PLCs. These PLCs are used for various industrial applications including controlling compressors. American Wire Gage (AWG) The measurement system used to indicate the diameter of the wire. The gage number increases as the wire diameter decreases. Analog Input An electrical device, which represents a specific real world pressure, temperature, vibration or current. As these items fluctuate, the electrical signal to and from the microprocessor board also fluctuates proportionally to the amount of change. The electrical signal is typically in the form of a current that ranges from 4 to 20 milli-amps in magnitude. Analog Output An electrical signal, which typically represents the inlet and bypass valve position. As these valves fluctuate, the electrical signal to and from the microprocessor board also fluctuates proportionally to the amount of change. The electrical signal is typically in the form of a current that ranges from 4 to 20 milli-amps in magnitude. Auto-Cold Start A control mode that automatically energizes the panel power, opens cooling water flow valve to the coolers, turns on seal air, starts and loads the compressor on a low pressure condition.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

2
Choke Also know as stonewall. This is the maximum flow that can be compressed by a given machines hardware configuration. Circuit Breaker An automatic switch that stops the flow of electric current in a suddenly overloaded or abnormally stressed electric circuit. CMC Centac MicroController. CMC System Any combination of CMC control components which when combined create a control system. The typical CMC system consists of a Base Control Module (BCM), Operator User Interface (OUI), and Power Supply (PS). A common variation on the typical system is the addition of a Universal Communications Module (UCM). Coast Timer The time interval, in seconds, between a compressor stop or trip and the motor coming to a complete stop. The timer is used to inhibit restarting. Compressor Load, Load The power consumption of the compressor. It is typically indicated in amps, kilowatts, SCFM, etc. COM Port See Serial Port. Control Transformer The transformer that is used to reduce the incoming voltage (for the prelube pump motor and oil heater) to approximately 120 volts for controlling the CMC electrical devices (relays, power supply, etc.). Control Valve The inlet or bypass valve used to control pressure or current. Control Variable, Process Variable The variable being regulated. When at MinLoad the control variable is load for the inlet valve and System Pressure for the bypass valve. When at MaxLoad the control variable is load and when loaded the control variable is System Pressure. CSA Approval Canadian Standards Association approval is required for all electrical devices shipped into Canada. This association is similar to UL for the United States and CE for Europe. CT Current Transformer. CT Input Channel The current transformer input channel. CT Ratio Current Transformer Ratio. The current transformer ratio used in displaying the motor current; e.g. 600:5 = 120. Current Transformer The electrical device used to measure the amps of the main drive motor. For our standard application, we only measure the current from one of the three phases. Daisy Chain A method of wiring a communication network. This method starts with the master and it is wired directly to compressor #1. Compressor #2 is wired to compressor #1, then compressor #3 is wired to compressor #2. Data Highway Plus A communication protocol used by Allen-Bradley PLC 5 and SLC500 PLCs. DCS See Distributed Control System. degC Degrees Celsius, Centigrade.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


degF Degrees Fahrenheit. DH+ See Data Highway Plus. Derivative Mode Provides a change in the control variable (through the inlet or bypass valve) based on the rate of change of the error (setpoint pressure minus system pressure). Derivative Constant Also know as the rate time, in units of seconds. Design Point The pressure and capacity required at maximum ambient conditions. Digital Device A device which is either on or off; e.g., the N.C. contact on the seal air switch. Discrete Device See Digital Device. Discharge Pressure The gas pressure between the last stage of compression and the check valve. Distributed Control System A system that attempts to control an entire plant or process with multiple independent local controllers by networking these local controllers to a central computer through digital communications. These central computers can be a PC, PLCs or other larger systems. Some manufacturers of these DCS products are Bailey, Honeywell, Allen-Bradley, Siemens, and others. Drain Wire An insulated wire in contact with a shield throughout its length, and used for terminating the shield. Dry Contacts A set of contacts that require a power source supplied by others (customer). This is the normal type of contacts that we provide. Electro-pneumatic A term used to indicate a combination of electronics and pneumatics. In the past, we provided electro-pneumatic panels as standard equipment. With the advent of digital computers, most all control panels are electronic. ERAM Erasable Random Access Memory. FactoryLink One of many SCADA software packages that can be used for air system integration. FLA Motor Full Load Amps. The motor amperage at full load, this value is found on the motor nameplate. Flexible Conduit Small diameter hose, made of plastic coated aluminum, which is used to enclose wire from the control panel to machine mounted instruments. Fused Disconnect As a safety precaution, this option removes power from the panel before the door is opened. By turning the rotary door handle, the panel power is terminated. The disconnect would have to be mounted external to the panel enclosure. The short circuit capacity, maximum ground fault, motor full load amps, motor locked rotor amps and motor voltage must be known to size the disconnect properly. Ground A connection to earth or to some extended conducting body that serves instead of the earth.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Ground Loop An unwanted, continuous ground current flowing back and forth between two devices that are at different ground potentials. Grounded System An electrical system in which at least one point (usually a wire) is intentionally grounded. High Load Limit See HLL HLL High Load Limit. The load that the controller maintains when at MaxLoad. I/O See Input/Output. IBV Inlet Butterfly Valve. See Inlet Valve. IEC International ElectroTechnical Commission is the governing body of Europe for electrical equipment and codes. IGV Inlet Guide Vanes. See Inlet Valve. Inlet Unload Position The position of the inlet valve when in the unloaded state. Inlet Valve The device used on the inlet pipe to the compressor that restricts the amount of airflow to the compressor. This valve can be a butterfly valve or a valve with inlet guide vanes. Input/Output The hardware interface between the compressor and the control system. This term generically applies to the entire interface circuit including sensor, wiring, and junction points. Instrument Air The air supply to the panel that is directed to the power air system for the inlet and bypass valves and the compressor seals. Integral Mode Provides a change in the control variable (through the inlet or bypass valve) based on the time history of the error (setpoint pressure minus system pressure). Integral Time Constant This value is expressed in repeats per second and represents the number of times per second the integral mode acts. Intellution One of many SCADA software packages that can be used for air system integration. Interface The hardware or software device used to communicate between products. Interlock An electrical function that prevents the compressor from starting in the event that the function has not been satisfied. For example, the seal air interlock prevents the compressor from starting until the seal air pressure is adequate. IRBUS The proprietary communication protocol used to communicate to and from one or many Base Control Modules (BCM), Universal Communication Modules (UCM) and Operator User Interfaces (OUI). Loopback A diagnostic test in which a transmitted communication signal is returned to the sending device after passing through all or part of the communication network. This test compares the transmitted signal to the received signal. The test passes if the signals are identical.

3
MA, mA Milliampere Maintained Contact A contact closure that remains closed. MaxLoad The message displayed on the OUI Status Bar when the machine is running at MaxLoad. MinLoad The message displayed on the OUI Status Bar when the machine is running at MinLoad. MMI Man Machine Interface. The term used to indicate the device or method used for a human to interface with a machine. Typically these interfaces are LCD displays or computer screens. For the CMC, the MMI is the Operator User Interface (OUI). Modbus A sixteen-bit communication protocol originally developed for Modicon PLCs. This protocol has become a defacto standard for industrial equipment. Modicon A PLC brand name manufactured by Schneider Automation. Modulate The control mode that opens and closes (modulates) the inlet or bypass valve to maintain a constant discharge pressure. This is the primary control mode for centrifugal compressors. Momentary Contact A contact closure that closes and then opens. N.C. Normally Closed. Used to indicate the state of a contact when no power is applied. N.O. Normally Open. Used to indicate the state of a contact when no power is applied. Natural Curve The set of pressure and capacity points that define the operating characteristic of the centrifugal compressor. Natural Surge The point on the natural curve that is represented by the maximum pressure and minimum capacity. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Network A series of points, nodes or devices connected by some type of communication medium. On-Line/Off-Line Control mode that allows the system discharge pressure to fluctuate between two pressure setpoints. The compressor will load when the actual pressure is below the lower setpoint pressure and will unload when it reaches the higher setpoint pressure. This type of control mode is normally used on reciprocating and rotary compressors. OUI Operator User Interface. The device on the CMC that gathers user inputs and provides compressor operating status. Parity The addition of non-information bits to make up a data transmission block that ensures the total number of 1s is either even (even parity) or odd (odd parity). This is used to detect errors in communication transmission. Partial Unload See Surge Absorber.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

4
Password The four digit parameter used to determine when the user can modify setpoints. The range of this password is 0000 to 9999. PID Proportional, Integral, Derivative. The parameters used to adjust the behavior of PID control loops. PLC Programmable Logic Controller. This hardware device is configurable such that many types of analog and digital inputs and outputs can be utilized to control various industrial products. PLC 5 Type of Allen-Bradley PLC used for large applications. Pneumatic Run by or using compressed air. Positioner The device on a control valve that instructs the actuator how much (to what position) to move the valve. PROM Programmable Read Only Memory. Proportional Mode Provides a change in the control variable (through the inlet or bypass valve) proportional to the error (setpoint pressure minus system pressure). Proportional Band Constant The percent change in system air pressure that causes a percent change in the valve position. This value is dimensionless. Protocol A formal set of conventions governing the formatting and relative timing of message exchange between two communication systems. RAM Random Access Memory. Relative Address For Modbus compliant devices, the four-digit address within the range of 0-9999. The relative address can be determined from the absolute address by deleting the type (the ten-thousandth place) and subtracting one. Reload Percent The reload pressure, in percent of user pressure set point, at which the machine will load when Autodual is active. Rigid Conduit Small diameter pipe, made of carbon steel with welded connections, which is used to enclose wire from the control panel to machine mounted instruments. This conduit is typically used in hazardous area classifications. Rise To Surge The amount of pressure from the operating pressure to the natural surge pressure. This amount is usually expressed in percent. RS-232 Electronic Industries Association interface standard between data terminal equipment and data communication equipment, using serial binary data interchange. This is the most common standard used by industry. RS-232 to RS-422/485 Converter A hardware device that electrically converts an RS-232 signal into an RS-422 or RS-485 signal. RS-422 Electronic Industries Association interface standard that specifies electrical characteristics for balanced circuits and extends transmission speed and distances beyond RS-232. This standard is a balanced voltage system with a high level of noise immunity.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


RS-485 Electronic Industries Association balanced interface standard similar to RS-422, but uses a tri-state driver for multi-drop applications. RTD Resistance Temperature Detector. An instrument that measures temperature by detecting the voltage across the RTD material (mostly platinum). The temperature is determined because as the temperature increases the resistance increases. RTU Remote Terminal Unit. A device typically used for data acquisition to gather data. By using this definition, the Base Control Module is an RTU. SCADA Supervisor Control and Data Acquisition. The generic classification for software that gathers data for control of industrial products. Sequencer A hardware or software device that controls the order in which compressors starts, stops, loads and unloads. Some sequencers also control loading and unloading through incremental pressure setpoints among the compressors. For example, in a threecompressor application the setpoints may be 101 psi for compressor #1, 100 psi for compressor #2 and 99 psi for compressor #3. Assuming the pressure transducers were calibrated within one psi of each other and the machines were running unloaded, this configuration would drive compressor #1 to load first when the pressure dropped to 101 psi. Serial Device A Personal Computer (PC), Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Distributed Control System (DCS) or any other device that can transmit, receive and interpret an RS422/485 formatted signal. Serial Port The RS-232 connection on the back of a PC to communicate with other equipment. This connection is typically referred to as COM1. A single PC can have more than one serial port. Service Tool The software used on the PC to configure, tune, record and log data from the CMC. Setpoint Ramp Rate The gradual increase of the system pressure set point during a loading operation of the compressor. The ramping of the system pressure set point helps to smooth the transition and prevents a pressure overshoot in the air system upon initial compressor loading. Shielded Wire Wire that has a sheet, screen or braid of metal, usually copper, aluminum, or other conducting material placed around or between electric circuits or cables or their components, to contain any unwanted radiation, or to keep out any unwanted interference. SLC500 Type of Allen-Bradley PLC used for relatively small applications and is lower in cost than an equivalent PLC 5. Start Timer The time interval, in seconds, between pressing the Start button and the compressor is running at full speed. The timer is used to transition wye delta

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


starters, inhibit loading, de-energize the prelube pump, and disable the alternate alarm and trip setpoints. Status Bar The Status Bar provides four distinct types of information (Compressor Operating State, Compressor Status, Compressor Control Location and Page Number). This region is always visible from any folder and page combination. Stonewall See Choke. Surge Absorber The reaction of the control system to a surge that pops the bypass valve open by a small percentage to get the compressor out of the surge condition. This feature is initiated by surge detection. Surge Anticipation The ability of a control system to prevent surge by predicting that a surge is about to happen. Surge Detection The ability of a control system to indicate that a surge has happened. This feature is important because a persistent surge condition can damage the compressor. Once detected, the control system can respond to the event by taking a corrective action; i.e., by opening the bypass valve. Surge Indexing A method of automatically increasing the setting of TL upon a surge. Surge Indexing TL The setpoint at which the inlet valve controls to MinLoad. Surge Line A series of points that represent natural surge for various inlet pressure conditions. Surge PTX Surge Pressure Transducer. Surge PTX is mounted between the last compression stage and the check valve. Surge Sensitivity A setpoint that is used to indicate the magnitude of pressure and current changes that occur during a surge condition. This setpoint determines when the control system detects a surge. Surge Unload The reaction of the control system to a surge that unloads the compressor to exit the surge condition. This feature is initiated by surge detection. System Pressure The pressure at the location of the system pressure transducer. Terminal Block A device that is used to connect to wires. Typically, these blocks are provided for customer field wiring to the panel and when one wire is to be connected to multiple devices. Terminating Resistor A resistor placed at the end of a communication network for absorbing or sufficiently attenuating signals incident on it so that they are not reflected back into the transmission line at amplitudes where they would cause distortion of the data signal. Typically, a resistor is placed at each end of the network to help eliminate noise. Thermocouple A device used to measure temperatures accurately and consists of two dissimilar metals joined so that a voltage is generated between to the contacts of the two metals as the temperature changes. Throttle Limit See TL.

5
Throttled Surge The condition created by closing the inlet valve past the surge point to maintain constant pressure. Tight Closure A term used to describe the inlet valve position when the compressor is not running and starting. The inlet valve ideally is closed tightly when stopped to prevent reverse rotation of the compressor if the check valve fails. Also, to reduce the load on the compressor during starting, the inlet valve can be held closed for a short period of time (less than thirty seconds) after the start button is pushed. This is most typically done on compressors at high altitude, most notably snow making applications. Bearing analysis must be done prior to using this option. TL Throttle Limit. Establishes the minimum flow through the machine when loaded, it is the maximum point of inlet valve throttling. If system demand is below this throttle point, the compressor must bypass air to maintain pressure setpoint or unload. TL increment value When Surge Indexing is enabled, the TL increment value is the amount added to the Surge Indexing TL upon a surge. The Surge Indexing TL will stop being incremented when and if the value reaches MaxLoad. Transducer An electrical device that provides a usable output (4-20 mA, 0-5 vDC, etc.) in response to a measured property (pressure, temperature, etc.). Transformer An electrical device that transfers energy from one circuit to another by electromagnetic induction. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor An electrical device that prevents temporary over-voltages of short duration (typically associated with lightning strikes and ground faults on an ungrounded system) from damaging other electrical equipment. Transmitter An electrical device that sends the digital representation of a real measured value (e.g., pressure, temperature), to the BCM in the control panel for analysis and display. Turndown The amount of capacity that can be decreased from full load (maximum load) at a constant pressure before the bypass valve begins to open to avoid surge. This amount is usually expressed as a percent of full load capacity. TVSS See Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor. Twisted Pair Wire Paired cables allow balanced signal transmission, which results in signals with low noise. Due to the improved noise immunity of twisted pairs, data speeds are usually higher than those of multi-conductor cables. UCM Universal Communications Module. The device that allows outside systems to communicate with the CMC. UL Underwriters Laboratory.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

6
Ungrounded System An electrical system, without an intentional connection to ground. Unload The operating mode that passes a small amount of air through the compressor and bypasses it to the atmosphere. In this mode, the inlet valve is cracked open a small amount and the bypass valve is fully open. This mode is used when starting the compressor before loading, stopping the compressor and during periods of no demand. Unload Point The bypass valve position, in percent open, at which the Autodual unload timer will start timing to unload the compressor when Autodual is active. User Pressure Set Point The local control pressure set point. Valve Stroking The process of calibrating the valves to align the fully open position to 100 percent and the fully closed position to 0 percent of output signal. VDC Volts Direct Current Voltage Regulator An electrical device that maintains voltage to a predefined level. Wait Timer The delay interval, in seconds, between power up and the ready state. Wire Gage See American Wire Gage. Wonderware One of many SCADA software packages that can be used for air system integration.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

Z-Purge Required when the customer environment is Division 2. A Type Z Purge reduces the classification within an enclosure from Division 2 too non-hazardous. When provided, a NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosure is required. Hand valve selectable quick and slow purges, with flow meters are provided to regulate the amount of gas entering the panel. A differential pressure switch is wired to a light on the front of the panel to indicate if there is a loss of purge gas. A relief valve is installed to prevent over-pressurization and a warning label, text below, is affixed to the front of the panel.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL

7
BV_P_PID_I Bypass Valve Pressure PID Integral. The Bypass valve pressure control integral constant, dimensionless. BV_P_PID_P Bypass Valve Pressure PID Proportional. The Bypass valve pressure control proportional constant, dimensionless. BV_Unload_Rate Bypass Valve Unload Rate. This setting determines the rate at which the bypass valve will open during an unload sequence. Bypass_Valve_C Bypass Valve Command. The position, in percent open, sent to the bypass valve by the controller. This is the value of an analog output. Bypass_Valve_Manl Bypass Valve Manual. The manual bypass valve position, in percent open. Coast_Timer The time interval, in seconds, between a compressor stop or trip and the motor coming to a complete stop. The timer is used to inhibit restarting. CT_Ratio Current Transformer Ratio. The current transformer ratio used in displaying the motor current; e.g. 600:5 = 120. Current_Rate_SP The current rate set point for the analog surge sensor. HLL High Load Limit. The load that the controller maintains when at MaxLoad. Inlet_Valve_C Inlet Valve Command. The position, in percent open, sent to the inlet valve by the controller. This is the value of an analog output. Inlet_Valve_Manl Inlet Valve Manual. The manual inlet valve position, in percent open. IV_HLL_PID_D Inlet Valve High Load Limit PID Derivative. The inlet valve MaxLoad control derivative constant, dimensionless. IV_HLL_PID_I Inlet Valve High Load Limit PID Integral. The inlet valve MaxLoad control integral constant, dimensionless. IV_HLL_PID_P Inlet Valve High Load Limit PID Proportional. The inlet valve MaxLoad control proportional constant, dimensionless. IV_P_PID_D Inlet Valve Pressure PID Derivative. The inlet valve pressure control derivative constant, dimensionless. IV_P_PID_I Inlet Valve Pressure PID Integral. The inlet valve pressure control integral constant, dimensionless. IV_P_PID_P Inlet Valve Pressure PID Proportional. The inlet valve pressure control proportional constant, dimensionless. IV_TL_PID_D Inlet Valve Throttle Limit PID Derivative. The inlet valve MinLoad control derivative constant, dimensionless. IV_TL_PID_I Inlet Valve Throttle Limit PID Integral. The inlet valve MinLoad control integral constant, dimensionless.

Service Tool Variable Names


The following variable names are used in the CMC Service Tool.
Ad_unload_tmr Autodual unload timer. The time delay, in seconds, at which the machine will be unloaded after the bypass valve has passed and stayed below the unload point when Autodual is active. ASF Adjusted Service Factor. The Ingersoll-Rand supplied value for determining MaxLoad. Auto_Start_Pressure The system pressure, in pressure setpoint units, at which the machine will start when either auto hot or cold start is active. Bat_Var_1 Battery Backed Variable 1. Password character 1 that is entered by the user to enable set point changes. This value is compared to the system password character 1. Bat_Var_2 Battery Backed Variable 2. Password character 1 that is entered by the user to enable set point changes. This value is compared to the system password character 2. Bat_Var_3 Battery Backed Variable 3. Password character 1 that is entered by the user to enable set point changes. This value is compared to the system password character 3. Bat_Var_4 Battery Backed Variable 4. Password character 1 that is entered by the user to enable set point changes. This value is compared to the system password character 4. Bat_Var_5 Battery Backed Variable 5. The power on hour meter. Bat_Var_6 Battery Backed Variable 6. The running hours hour meter. Bat_Var_7 Battery Backed Variable 7. The loaded hour meter. Bat_Var_8 Battery Backed Variable 8. The number of starts counter. Bv_Closed_Value Bypass Valve Closed Value. This setting determines the value at which the bypass valve is considered closed. This value is used in logic to determine when to release the inlet valve from MinLoad control and enable the inlet valve for pressure control etc. Bv_Open_Value Bypass Valve Open Value. This setting determines the value at which the bypass valve is considered open. This value is used in logic to determine when to release the inlet valve for unloading. BV_P_PID_D Bypass Valve Pressure PID Derivative. The Bypass valve pressure control derivative constant, dimensionless.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

8
IV_TL_PID_P Inlet Valve Throttle Limit PID Proportional. The inlet valve MinLoad control proportional constant, dimensionless. IV_Unld_Pos Inlet Valve Unload Position. Inlet valve position when the compressor is running unloaded. IV_Unload_Rate Inlet Valve Unload Rate. This setting determines the rate at which the inlet valve will open during an unload sequence. M_rate_current The steady state current rate value. M_rate_pressure The steady state pressure rate value. Manual_C Manual Control. (1) Enables and (0) disables manual valve control. MaxLoad The message displayed on the OUI Status Bar when the machine is running at MaxLoad. MinLoad The message displayed on the OUI Status Bar when the machine is running at MinLoad. Motor_Current Motor current, in amps. Oil_Pressure Oil pressure. Oil_Pressure_LAV Oil Pressure Low Alarm Value. Oil_Pressure_LAV2 Oil Pressure Low Alarm Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Pressure_LTV Oil Pressure Low Trip Value. Oil_Pressure_LTV2 Oil Pressure Low Trip Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Temp_HAV Oil Temperature High Alarm Value. Oil_Temp_HAV2 Oil Temperature High Alarm Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Temp_HTV Oil Temperature High Trip Value. Oil_Temp_HTV2 Oil Temperature High Trip Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Temp_LAV Oil Temperature Low Alarm Value. Oil_Temp_LAV2 Oil Temperature Low Alarm Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Temp_LTV Oil Temperature Low Trip Value. Oil_Temp_LTV2 Oil Temperature Low Trip Value during running, coasting or stopped. Oil_Temperature Oil temperature. PASSWD1 Password Variable 1. This is the system password character 1. PASSWD2 Password Variable 2. This is the system password character 2. PASSWD3 Password Variable 3. This is the system password character 3. PASSWD4 Password Variable 4. This is the system password character 4. Pressure_Rate_SP The pressure rate set point for the analog surge sensor. PSP_Ramp Pressure Set Point Ramp Rate. The rate at which the system pressure set point is incremented to the user system pressure set point. This is used to prevent system pressure overshoot when loading the compressor.

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


PSP_Tol Pressure Setpoint Tolerance. This setting determines the pressure value tolerance at which valve control transitions between states; i.e., load limit to pressure control. Reload_Percent The reload pressure, in percent of user system pressure set point, at which the machine will load when Autodual is active. Stage(n)_Temp Stage (n) Temperature. This air temperature for stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, is measured at the discharge from the inter or after cooler. This is the value of an analog input. Stage(n)_Temp_HAV Stage (n) Temperature High Alarm Value. This is an air temperature set point for the high alarm value. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Temp_HAV2 Stage (n) Temperature High Alarm Value during running, coasting or stopped.. This is an air temperature set point for the high alarm value of the 2x multiplier. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Temp_HTV Stage (n) Temperature High Trip Value. This is an air temperature set point for the high trip value. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Temp_HTV2 Stage (n) Temperature High Trip Value during running, coasting or stopped.. This is an air temperature set point for the high trip value of the 2x multiplier. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Vib Stage (n) Vibration. This vibration for stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. This is the value of an analog input. Stage(n)_Vib_HAV Stage (n) Vibration High Alarm Value. This is a vibration set point for the high alarm value. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Vib_HAV2 Stage (n) Vibration High Alarm Value during running, coasting or stopped. This is a vibration set point for the high alarm value of the 2x multiplier. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Vib_HTV Stage (n) Vibration High Trip Value. This is a vibration set point for the high trip value. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Stage(n)_Vib_HTV2 Stage (n) Vibration High Trip Value during running, coasting or stopped.. This is a vibration set point for the high trip value of the 2x multiplier. This applies to stage n, where n can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Start_Timer The time interval, in seconds, between pressing the Start button and the compressor is running at full speed. The timer is used to transition wye delta starters, inhibit loading, de-energize the prelube pump, and disable the alternate alarm and trip setpoints.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

CMC TECHNICAL REFERENCE MANUAL


Surge_PTX Surge Pressure Transducer. Surge_PTX is mounted between the last compression stage and the check valve. TL Throttle Limit. Establishes the minimum flow through the machine when loaded, it is the maximum point of inlet valve throttling. If system demand is below this throttle point, the compressor must bypass air to maintain pressure setpoint or unload. TL_Tol Throttle Limit Tolerance. This setting determines the load value tolerance at which inlet valve control transitions from pressure control to MinLoad control. Unload_Point The bypass valve position, in percent open, at which the Autodual unload timer will start timing to unload the compressor when Autodual is active. User_PSP User Pressure Set Point. The local control pressure set point. Wait_Timer The delay interval, in seconds, between power up and the ready state.

1X36003 Version 2.52 1996-1999 Ingersoll-Rand Company Date of Issue: 18-Oct-1999

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi